Menu

Matthew 14:13 — Word Study

Depth

N1904Καὶ Ἀκούσας δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων.

BSAandkai Having heardakouō now <the>ho JesusIēsous [the Greek name for Joshua, meaning God is salvation] withdrewanachōreō [departed, went away] from thereekeithen byen boatploion [a ship, vessel] toeis a secludederēmos [deserted, uninhabited] placetopos apartkata [on his] own.idios [quiet place] Andkai having heard [of it]akouō theho crowdsochlos [a large group of people, multitude] followedakoloutheō Himautos on footpezē [by land, walking] fromapo theho towns.polis [cities, populated areas]

Word
Listen & take awayMatthew 14
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 13 is in this chapter.
Greek ↓ Download MP3 Nestle 1904 — the very text on this page — read by Andy Martin in Erasmian pronunciation.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (polis) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Matthew 14:13quick helps
In a sentenceJesus hears about John the Baptist's death and seeks solitude, but the crowds pursue Him.
Who is speakingJesus, who is responding to news about John.
Where we areThe context follows the beheading of John the Baptist, emphasizing Jesus' need for retreat.
The hard wordἀνεχώρησεν
Take awayEven in solitude, Jesus' ministry continues as the crowds follow Him.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Trapp, Ellicott & more — read them › clause subjectἀκούω verbἀκούω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Matthew 14:13

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Death of John the Baptistgenerated

12Then John’s disciples came and took his body and buried it. And they went and informed Jesus.
13When Jesus heard about John, He withdrew by boat privately to a solitary place. But the crowds found out about it and followed Him on foot from the towns.
14When He stepped ashore and saw a large crowd, He had compassion on them and healed their sick.
15When evening came, the disciples came to Him and said, “This is a desolate place, and the hour is already late. Dismiss the crowds so they can go to the villages and buy themselves some food.”

Matthew 14:13 recounts how Jesus, upon hearing of John the Baptist's death, sought a solitary place by boat. However, the crowds, eager for His teaching and healing, followed Him on foot from the towns. This moment illustrates the relentless demand on Jesus' time and the deep compassion He felt for the people, as seen in the subsequent verses where He heals their sick.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Matthew 14:1–2At that time Herod the tetrarch heard the reports about Jesus
2Matthew 10:23When they persecute you in one town, flee to the next. Truly I tell you, you will not reach all the towns of Israel before the Son of Man comes.
3Matthew 12:15Aware of this, Jesus withdrew from that place. Large crowds followed Him, and He healed them all,
4Mark 6:30–33Meanwhile, the apostles gathered around Jesus and brought Him news of all they had done and taught.
5Luke 9:10–17Then the apostles returned and reported to Jesus all that they had done. Taking them away privately, He withdrew to a town called Bethsaida.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 6 references, hung on the phrase they belong to

When Jesus heard of it, he departed thence by ship into a desert place apart: and when the people had heard thereof, they followed him on foot out of the cities.Matthew 14:1–2 Matthew 10:23 Matthew 12:15 Mark 6:30–33 Luke 9:10–17 John 6:1–15

The Key Word ἀνεχώρησεν, anachōreōgenerated

The verb ἀναχωρέω, meaning 'to withdraw' or 'to leave,' is in the aorist active indicative form, indicating a completed action. This suggests a decisive departure by Jesus from the crowds to seek solitude, reflecting His human need for rest and reflection.

This term emphasizes the physical act of retreat, which is significant in the context of Jesus' ministry. It highlights His awareness of the pressures surrounding Him, as well as His intention to find a moment of peace amidst the demands of the people.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as 'He withdrew by boat privately to a solitary place.' The KJV uses 'departed thence by ship into a desert place apart,' emphasizing the separation from the crowd.

Translations differ primarily in the rendering of ἀνεχώρησεν. The BSB and WEB use 'withdrew,' while the KJV and ASV say 'departed.' This reflects slight variations in how translators perceive the nuance of Jesus' action.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main clause is governed by the verb ἀνεχώρησεν, He withdrew, with several phrases hanging off it: a prepositional phrase indicating the means of withdrawal, another prepositional phrase describing the destination, and a participial phrase detailing the actions of the crowds.

The structure shows a clear sequence of actions: Jesus hears, withdraws, and the crowds respond, illustrating the flow of the narrative and the relationship between Jesus and the people.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἔρημος is used in the Septuagint to describe deserted places, often in the context of wilderness or solitude, as seen in passages like Isaiah 35:1. Here, it emphasizes the uninhabited nature of the place Jesus sought.

The term ἀκούω appears in the Septuagint as well, often translated from the Hebrew שָׁמַע, which means 'to hear,' indicating a continuity in the theme of listening and understanding God's message.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Matthew 14:13 tells us that after learning of John the Baptist's death, Jesus sought a quiet place by boat. However, the crowds learned where He was going and followed Him on foot from the towns, demonstrating their desire to be near Him.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

Why did Jesus withdraw to a solitary place?

Jesus withdrew to seek solitude and reflect after hearing about John the Baptist's death, indicating His human need for rest.

What does it mean that the crowds followed Him on foot?

The crowds' pursuit of Jesus on foot signifies their desperation and eagerness to receive His teaching and healing, emphasizing His popularity.

How does this passage reflect Jesus' compassion?

Despite His desire for solitude, Jesus' compassion for the crowds led Him to continue His ministry, healing their sick when He saw them.

What can we learn from Jesus' response to the news about John?

Jesus' response highlights the importance of taking time for oneself, even amidst busy ministry, and shows that He values both personal reflection and the needs of others.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what ways can I seek solitude in my own life to reflect and recharge?
  2. How can I respond to the needs of others while also taking care of my own well-being?
  3. What does Jesus' compassion for the crowds teach me about serving others?
  4. How can I be more aware of the demands on my time and the importance of rest?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early church commentators provide insights on Jesus' actions following the news of John's death, reflecting on His retreat and the significance of His ministry.

Glossa Ordinariaap. Anselm. 12th c.
The Saviour having heard the death of His Baptist, retired into the desert; as it follows, which when Jesus had heard, he departed thence by ship into a desert place.
Early Church Fathers on Matthew 14 →
Hilary of PoitiersCatena Aurea by Aquinas c. 310–367
Mystically; The Word of God, on the close of the Law, entered the ship, that is, the Church; and departed into the desert, that is, leaving to walk with Israel, He passes into breasts void of Divine knowledge.
Early Church Fathers on Matthew 14 →
JeromeCatena Aurea by Aquinas c. 347–420
He did not retire into the desert through fear of death, as some suppose, but in mercy to His enemies, that they might not add murder to murder; putting off His death till the day of His passion;
Early Church Fathers on Matthew 14 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Matthew 14:13 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

When Jesus heard of it,.... Of the death of John, and of the cruel usage he had met with; and particularly, that his fame had reached the court of Herod, and that he was talked of there, and said by

Read John Gill on Matthew 14 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And his disciples came, and took up the body, and buried it, and went and told Jesus. For the exposition of this section-one of the very few where all the four Evangelists run parallel-see the notes at Mark 6:30-44.

Read Robert Jamieson on Matthew 14 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

13 When Jesus heard of it, he departed thence by ship into a desert place apart: and when the people had heard thereof, they followed him on foot out of the cities. Ver. 13. When Jesus heard of it, &c.] Dangers must be declined, where they may be with a safe conscience. David and Peter (who had both paid for their learning) say both, What man is he that loveth life, and would see good (or quiet) days? Psalms 34:12; 1 Peter 3:10. They followed him on foot] Hotfoot, as they say. So the people resorted to Bishop Ridley’ s sermons, swarming about him like bees, and coveting the sweet juice of his godly discourses. Whose diligence and devotion is check to our dulness and devotion: if Christ…

Read John Trapp on Matthew 14 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(13) When Jesus heard of it.—We may, I think reverently trace as the motives of this withdrawal, (1) the strong personal emotion which the death of one whom Jesus had known and loved could not fail to cause, and (2) the wish to avoid being the centre of the popular excitement which the death of John was likely to cause, and which we know, as a matter of fact (Jos. Ant. xviii. 5, § 2), was so strong that men looked on all the subsequent troubles of Antipas and his wife as a retributive judgment for it. This was, indeed, sufficiently shown by the eagerness with which the people followed Him into His retirement. Two other circumstances, named by the other Evangelists, tended to increase the…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Matthew 14 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 13. When Jesus heard of it, he departed thence] Had the blessed Jesus continued in that place, it is probable the hand of this impure female murderer would have been stretched out against him also: he withdrew, therefore, not through fear, but to teach his messengers rather to yield to the storm than expose themselves to destruction, where, from circumstances, the case is evidently hopeless. The people - followed him on foot] πεζη, or, by land, which is a common acceptation of the word in the best Greek writers. See many examples in Kypke.

Read AdamClarke on Matthew 14 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

13–21. Jesus retires to a Desert Place, where He feeds Five Thousand Mark 6:31-44; Luke 9:10-17; John 6:5-14 This is the only miracle narrated by all the Evangelists. In St John it prepares the way for the memorable discourse on the “Bread of Life.” St John also mentions, as a result of this miracle, the desire of the people “to take Him by force and make Him a king.” There is a question as to the locality of the miracle. St Luke says (ch. Matthew 9:10) that Jesus “went aside privately into a desert place belonging to a city called Bethsaida.” St Mark (ch. Mark 6:45) describes the disciples as crossing to Bethsaida after the miracle. The general inference has been that there were two…

Read Cambridge on Matthew 14 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

A full narrative of the feeding the five thousand is given in each of the other evangelists: in Mark 6:32-44; in Luke 9:10-17; in John 6:1-14. Matthew 14:13 And when Jesus heard of it, he departed - He went to a place of safety.

Read Albert Barnes on Matthew 14 →
Daniel Denison Whedon1808–1885Whedon's Commentary on the Bible

13. Jesus heard of it, he departed — The death of John transpired while the twelve were absent on their mission, described in chapter tenth.

Read Daniel Denison Whedon on Matthew 14 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

When Jesus heard about John, He withdrew by boat privately to a solitary place. But the crowds found out about it and followed Him on foot from the towns.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Now when Jesus heard this, he withdrew from there in a boat to a deserted place apart. When the multitudes heard it, they followed him on foot from the cities.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

When Jesus heard about John, He withdrew by boat privately to a solitary place. But the crowds found out about it and followed Him on foot from the towns.

NETBNew English Translation2006

Now when Jesus heard this he went away from there privately in a boat to an isolated place. But when the crowd heard about it, they followed him on foot from the towns.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

¶ When Jesus heard of it, he departed thence by ship into a desert place apart: and when the people had heard thereof, they followed him on foot out of the cities.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

Now when Jesus heard it, he withdrew from thence in a boat, to a desert place apart: and when the multitudes heard thereof, they followed him on foot from the cities.

RVARevised Version, American1894

Now when Jesus heard it, he withdrew from thence in a boat, to a desert place apart: and when the multitudes heard thereof, they followed him on foot from the cities.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

When Jesus heard of it , he departed thence in a boat, into a desert place apart: and when the people had heard of it , they followed him on foot out of the cities.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And when Iesus heard it, hee departed thence by shippe into a desert place apart. And when the multitude had heard it, they followed him on foote out of the cities.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And Jesus, having heard it, went away thence by ship to a desert place apart. And the crowds having heard [of it] followed him on foot from the cities.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

and Jesus having heard, withdrew thence in a boat to a desolate place by himself, and the multitudes having heard did follow him on land from the cities.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

and Jesus having heard, withdrew from there in a boat to a desolate place by Himself, and the multitudes having heard followed Him on land from the cities.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Now when Jesus heard this, he withdrew from there in a boat to an isolated place. When the crowds heard of it, they followed him on foot from the cities.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

Which when Jesus had heard, he retired from thence by boat, into a desert place apart, and the multitudes having heard of it, followed him on foot out of the cities.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

When Jesus heard the news he went away by boat to a quiet place to be alone, but when the crowds learned where he was, they followed him on foot from the towns.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Now when it came to the ears of Jesus, he went away from there in a boat, to a waste place by himself: and the people hearing of it, went after him on foot from the towns.

Word by word, the decisions they made

Ἀκούσαςakouō Having heard G191 3 different renderings
heardASV BSB FBV GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
having heardDBY DRA LSV YLT
hearingBBE
ἀνεχώρησενanachōreō withdrew G402 4 different renderings
he withdrewASV BSB MSB RVA ULB WEB
went awayBBE DBY FBV NETB
departedGNV KJV NWB
withdrewLSV YLT
πλοίῳploion boat G4143 2 different renderings
boatASV BBE BSB DRA FBV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
shipDBY KJV
ἔρημονerēmos a secluded G2048 4 different renderings
desertASV DBY DRA GNV KJV NWB RVA
desolateLSV YLT
solitaryBSB MSB
desertedWEB
ἰδίαν.idios [on his] own. G2398 2 different renderings
privatelyBSB MSB NETB
quiet placeFBV
ἀκούσαντεςakouō having heard [of it] G191 3 different renderings
heardASV BSB FBV GNV KJV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
having heardDBY DRA LSV YLT
hearingBBE

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseδὲnowclauseadverbialἈκούσαςHaving heardnoun phrase · subject-ἸησοῦςJesusverbἀνεχώρησενwithdrewadverbialἐκεῖθενfrom thereprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνbyπλοίῳboatprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςtonoun phraseἔρημονa secludedτόπονplaceprepositional phrase · adverbialκατ’apartἰδίανHimselfclauseκαὶAndclauseadverbialἀκούσαντεςhaving heard [of it]noun phrase · subjectοἱtheὄχλοιcrowdsverbἠκολούθησανfollowedobjectαὐτῷHimadverbialπεζῇon footprepositional phrase · adverbialἀπὸfromnoun phraseτῶνtheπόλεωνtowns

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Quod cum audisset Jesus, secessit inde in navicula, in locum desertum seorsum : et cum audissent turbæ, secutæ sunt eum pedestres de civitatibus.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܝܫܘܥ ܕܝܢ ܟܕ ܫܡܥ ܫܢܝ ܡܢ ܬܡܢ ܒܐܠܦܐ ܠܐܬܪܐ ܚܘܪܒܐ ܒܠܚܘܕܘܗܝ ܘܟܕ ܫܡܥܘ ܟܢܫܐ ܐܙܠܘ ܒܬܪܗ ܒܝܒܫܐ ܡܢ ܡܕܝܢܬܐ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Ἀκούσας δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Ἀκούσας δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

Ἀκούσας δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

Ἀκούσας δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

Ἀκούσας δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

Ἀκούσας δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

Καὶ Ἀκούσας Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

Καὶ Ἀκούσας Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν ἐκεῖθεν ἐν πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον τόπον κατ᾽ ἰδίαν. καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τῶν πόλεων.

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
Καὶ andTR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn
δὲ nowNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, TregTR, Byz

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Matthew 14:13καίandandκαίἀκούωHaving hearHaving heardἀκούωδέnownowδέ<the><the>ἸησοῦςJesusJesusἸησοῦςἀναχωρέωwithdrewwithdrewἀναχωρέωἐκεῖθενfrom therefrom thereἐκεῖθενἐνbybyἐνπλοῖονboatboatπλοῖονεἰςtotoεἰςἔρημοςa secludeda secludedἔρημοςτόποςplaceplaceτόποςκατάapartapartκατάἴδιος[on his] ow[on his] own.ἴδιοςκαίAndAndκαίἀκούωhaving hearhaving heard [oἀκούωthetheὄχλοςcrowdscrowdsὄχλοςἀκολουθέωfollowedfollowedἀκολουθέωαὐτόςHimHimαὐτόςπεζῇon footon footπεζῇἀπόfromfromἀπόthetheπόλιςtowns.towns.πόλιςἀνάPrep. and,Prep. and, apieἀνάἐκεῖAdv there,Adv there, yondἐκεῖπλέωv. I sailv. I sailπλέωχώραn.f. region.f. region, laχώραἄλφαletter theletter the firsἄλφαπολύςAdj much, Adj much, many,πολύςεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκἔχωv. I have,v. I have, holdἔχωἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦπούςn.m. the fn.m. the footπούςοὖςn.n. the en.n. the earοὖςφωνήn.f. a soun.f. a sound, nφωνήἔρημοςAdj desertAdj deserted, dἔρημοςμακρόθενAdv from aAdv from a distμακρόθενΝαζωραῖοςn.m. Nazarn.m. NazareneΝαζωραῖοςσωτήρn.m. a savn.m. a savior, σωτήρ
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Matthew 14:13

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
Καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
Ἀκούσαςakouō Having heard G191 Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
428× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To hear or listen, not just with our ears but also to understand and obey, as Jesus says in Mark 4:3 and Matthew 11:15. It involves paying attention to what is being said and responding accordingly.
Tyndale gloss
to hear
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀκούω, transliterated as akouo, means 'to hear' or 'to listen.' It covers a range of meanings from simply hearing sounds to understanding and obeying what is said. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including commands to listen (e.g., Mk 4:3) and references to understanding (e.g., 1 Cor 14:2). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀκούω,

[in LXX chiefly for שׁמע;]

to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing.

Intrans.: Mk 4:3 7:37, Ja 2:5, Re 2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mt 13:15(LXX); c. cogn. dat., ακοῇ ἀ. (v.s. ἀκοή), Mt 13:14, Ac 28:26(LXX); ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mt 11:15, Mk 4:23, Re 2:7, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀκούω [on the use of the pres. in a pf. sense ef. W. 274 sq. (258); B. 203 (176)]; impf. ἤκουον ; fut. (in best Grk. usage) ἀκούσομαι, Jn. v. 25 RGL, 28 RGL; Acts iii. 22; vii. 37 RG; xvii. 32; [xxi. 22]; xxv. 22; xxviii. 28; [Ro. x. 14 Tdf.], and (a later form) ἀκούσω. Mt. xii. 19; xiii. 14, (both fr. the Sept.) ; [Jn. x. 16; xvi. 13 Tr WH mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26]; Ro. x. 14 ΓΒ 617; and T Tr WH in Jn. v. 25, 28, (ef. W.82 (79); B. 53 (46) [Veitch 5. v.]); [1 aor. ἤκουσα; Jn. iii. 32, ete.]; pf. ἀκήκοα; Pass.,[ pres. ἀκούομαι; 1 fut.axovaOncopar]; 1 aor. ἠκούσθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; tohear. I. absol. 1. tobe endowed with the faculty of hearing (not deaf): Mk. vii. 37; Lk. vii. 22; Mt.xi.5. 2. to attend to (use the faculty of hearing), consider what is or has been said. So in exhortations: ἀκούετε, Mk. iv. 3; ἀκούσατε, Jas. ii. 5; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω, Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9, [in both T…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀκούω. The verb is of course common enough, and needs little or no illustration, having few peculiarities. Its use for a judicial hearing (as Ac 2523) may be paralleled with P Tand οἷ (ii/A.p.) Kal [pé]x [pr] τούτου οὔπο ἠκούσθ[ημ]εν, and P Oxy VII. 1032 (A.p. 162), where the epistrategus endorses a petition with ἀκουσθήσεται. So in BGU IL. 511i? (= Chrest. 1. p. 26), an account written about A.D. 200 of a trial before Claudius, we have ἀκούει Κλαύδιος Καῖσα[ρ Σέβαστος ᾿Ισιδώρου] γυμνασιάρχου πόλεως ᾿Α[λεξανδρέων] κατὰ ᾿Αγρίππου βασιλέω[ς]. The last example will illustrate ἀκούειν with normal gen. of person: P Par 485 (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski*® p. 91) ἀκούσαντες . . τὰ περὶ σοῦ συνβεβηκότα will serve for accus. vez, and will also illustrate the common use with περί, since the phrase is a mixture of ἀκ. περὶ σοῦ and ἀκ. τά σοι συνβεβηκότα (Witk.).…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀκούω (akouō) — to hear.

ἀκούω:

Epic dialect imperfect ᾰκουον[Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἀκούσομαι (active ἀκούσω first in [NT+4th c.BC+]aorist ἤκουσα, Epic dialect ᾰκουσα[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect ἀκήκοα, Laconian dialect ἄκουκα[Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἤκουκα is a late form, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; later Ionic dialect ἀκήκουκα[Refs 3rd c.BC+]: pluperfect ἀκηκόειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; old Attic dialect ἠκηκόη[Refs 5th c.BC+] —rare in middle, present (see. below [Refs]: Epic dialect imperfect ἀκούετο[Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκουσάμην[Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—passive, future ἀκουσθήσομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκούσθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἤκουσμαι[Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἀκήκουσμαι is uncertain in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: pluperfect ἤκουστο[Refs 4th c.BC+], (παρ-) [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—hear, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: properly with accusative of thing heard, genitive of person from whom it is heard, ταῦτα Καλυψοῦς ἤκουσα[Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀκούω

akouo

a primary verb; to hear (in various senses):--give (in the) audience

(of), come (to the ears), (shall) hear(-er, -ken), be noised, be

reported, understand.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀκούω

v.

I hear, listen

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀκούω akouō 428x

some list the future active as a middle deponent, ἀκούσομαι, to hear; to hearken, listen to, Mk. 4:3; Lk. 19:48; to heed, obey, Mt. 18:15; Acts 4:19; to understand, 1 Cor. 14:2; to take in or admit to mental acceptance, Mk. 4:33; Jn. 8:43, 47

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀκούω Root ΑΚΟϜ to hear, Hom., etc. —Construct., properly, c. acc. of thing heard, gen. of pers. from whom it is heard, ταῦτα Καλυψοῦς ἤκουσα Od.; the gen. pers. may be omitted, ἀκήκοας λόγον Soph., or the acc. rei, ἄκουε τοῦ θανόντος id. Soph.:—often however c. gen. rei, to have hearing of a thing.

c. gen. objecti, to hear of, hear tell of, ἀκ. πατρός Od.; so c. acc., Od.:—so, ἀκ. περί τινος.

the pers. from whom the thing is heard takes a prep., ἀκούειν τι ἀπό, ἔκ, παρά, πρός τινος, Il., attic

to know by hearsay, εἴ που ἀκούεις Od.; so Plat., etc.

absol. to hearken, give ear, to begin a proclamation, ἀκούετε λεώι hear, O people.

to listen to, give ear to, Il.

to obey, c. gen., or more rarely c. dat., id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-NSM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
20%having heard
having heard20% · 88×hearing10% · 45×hear9% · 39×i heard7% · 31×heard6% · 28×you have heard4% · 18×he should hear4% · 16×you hear2% · 9×other renderings37% · 161×

435 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 90 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb89%adverbial11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 428 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁράωI see, look uponαὐτόςβλέπωI look, see
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, exist
ὅς
ἀκούωI hear, listenπᾶςall, the whole, λόγοςa word, speech,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theὅτανwhen, whensoeverὡςas, like as, how
οὖςthe ear
ἔχωI have, hold, poArticle the
ἀκούωHaving heard428×
what comes after →
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, μαθητήςa learner, disciπερί
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegβλέπωI look, see
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτοςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅτιthat, since, because
εἶπονI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,πολύςmuch, many, ofteσυζητέωI seek together,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀκούω · 428× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Revelation Mark 1 John Hebrews Ephesians Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament23 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 515 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.16c. AD 40

ὅταν οὖν λέγῃ „ἰδεῖν τί καλέσει", ἄκουε ἴσον τῷ, διὰ τί καλέσει καὶ προσκαλέσεται καὶ ἀσπάσεται τούτων ἕκαστον ὁ νοῦς·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.184c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ μὲν ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας θυσίαν προσφέρει τῷ θεῷ κελευσθεὶς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.3c. AD 100

ἀκούσατε, πῶς περὶ τούτου πεφανέρωκαν οἱ ἱερεῖς τοῦ ναοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Lond. 7 2011Pharbaithos (Arsinoites)244 BC

r Παταικίων Ζήνωνι χαίρειν. ἀκηκόαμεν παρὰ Πύρρου τοὺς αἰπόλους ἀναχωρεῖν. τὸν μὲν οὖν Λιμναῖον ἔφη ἤδη ἀπεληλυθέναι, Δημήτριον δὲ

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59368Memphis (?)242 BC

ϛ ἔτους τινὰ δὲ ἐν τῶι Μεμφίτηι, ἃ εἶχεν Παμῆς καὶ Ἀμεννεύς, οὓς νῦν ἀκούομεν μεταγηγοχέναι εἰς τὸν Ἡρακλεοπολίτην ἄνευ ἡμῶν, Ἀμμώνιος δʼ ὁ οἰκονόμος ἀπαγήοχεν αὐτοὺς καὶ τὰ

P.Grenf. 2 36Pathyris96 BC

ἡμῖν κακὸν ἐποίησεν ἀλλʼ ἐκ τῶν ἐναντίων ἐπιμεμέληται, περὶ ὧν, ἐὰν αἱρῆτε, γράψατέ μοι. ἠκούσαμεν τὸν μῦν καταβεβρωκέναι τὸν σπόρον. καλῶς ἡμῖν ὦδε, ἢ ἐν Διοσπόλει ἐὰν αἱρῆσθε, πυρὸν

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
δὲ now G1161
2,787× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a conjunction that means and, but, or then, used to connect ideas like in Matthew 1:2 and 2 Corinthians 6:15.
Tyndale gloss
then
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),

post-positive conjunctive particle;

copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δέ (de) — then.

δέ,

but: adversative and copulative Particle,

I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. without preceding μέν,

II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. copulative,

II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δέ

de

a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,

etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δέ

Cj.

but, on the other hand, and

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δέ de 2x

a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.

δέ is often redundant,

to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.

to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.

POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%now
now33% · 974×however27% · 780×then21% · 620×and12% · 360×but5% · 154×other renderings2% · 49×

2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existσύ
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπεντακισχίλιοιfive thousand
εἰCond
παλαιόςold, ancient, woσύεἰμίI am, exist
εἰμίI am, exist
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ἀναπίπτωI lie down, reclμνημεῖονa tomb, sepulche
οὗτος
δίδωμιI offer, giveθεόςGod, a godπίστιςfaith, belief, t
δέnow2787×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusθεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐπί
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theσύ
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὗτοςἸωάννηςJohn
τὶς
Article theαὐτόςὄνομαname, character,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδέ · 2,787× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John Mark Romans 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians James 1 Timothy

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ho <the> G3588 Article · nominative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ἸησοῦςIēsous Jesus G2424 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Jesus is the Greek name for Joshua, which means God is salvation. It is used to refer to Jesus Christ, the son of God, as well as other Israelites with the same name. The name Jesus appears over 900 times in the New Testament.
Amplified meaning
the Greek name for Joshua, meaning God is salvation
Tyndale gloss
Joshua
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Ἰησοῦς (*Iēsous*) refers primarily to Jesus, the Savior, and is derived from the Hebrew name Joshua or Jehoshua. It appears frequently in the New Testament, denoting Jesus Christ, and also refers to other figures named Jesus, such as Jesus, son of Eliezer, and Jesus Justus. The entries consistently identify it as a common name among Israelites.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dat., voc. -οῦ, acc., -οῦν (Heb. יְהוֹשׁוּעַ, יְהֹשֻׁעַ, יֵשׁוּעַ),

JESUS: Mt 1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, Mt 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, Mt 1:1, Mk 1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Ro 2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Ac 28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mk 1:24, al.

Joshua: Ac 7:45, He 4:8.

Jesus, son of Eliezer: Lk 3:29.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Ἰησοῦς, -οὔ, dat. -οὔ, ace. -vdv, voc. -od, [W. § 10, 1], 6, Jesus (ΠῚ and ace. to a later form jw, Syr. > ” Saas, i. e. whose help is Jehovah; Germ. Gotthilf; but later writ. gave the name the force of My31w, see Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 Ἰησοῦς ὃς ἐγένετο κατὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ μέγας ἐπὶ σωτηρίᾳ ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ, of Joshua, the successor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21 Ἰησοῦς ἑρμηνεύεται σωτηρία κυρίου), a very Com. prop. name among the Israelites; cf. Delitzsch, Der Jesusname, in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or Talmud. Stud. xv.]. Inthe N. T. 1. Joshua [fully Jehoshua], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses’ successor: Acts vii. 45; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son of Eliezer, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 29 L T Tr WH. 3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of mankind: Mt. i. 21, 25; ΓΚ. i. 31; ii. 21, and very often; see κύριος and Χριστός. 4. Jesus…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Ἰησοῦς nor in language of disrespect to the established religion of our city”: see further CRE® p. 260, and Lightfoot Assays on Supernatural Religion, p. 299f., who cites an inscr. found in this very temple of Ephesus, though of a later date than the passage in Acts,—éorw ἱεροσυλία kal ἀσέβεια, ““let it be regarded as sacrilege and impiety” (Wood Zzscr. vi. I, p. 14). Other exx. of the adj. from the inscrr. are Syll 523% (iii/B.c.) ὁ δὲ εἴπας ἢ [πρήξ]ας τι παρὰ τόνδε τὸν νόμον .. . ἔστω ἱερόσυλος, 2). 6028 (iv/iii B.c.) ἢν δέ τις [τὴν στήλην] ἀφαν[(ζηι ἢ τὰ γράμματα], πασχέτω ὡς ἱερόσυλος, and 24. 680!° (Rom.). The new Menander shows several exx. of ἱερόσυλε used in abuse with a general sense (cf. ‘‘ horse-thief’’): e.g. Menandrea, p. 60 388 tep[d]ovde παῖ, Ρ. 3852: ἱερόσυλε…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Joshua.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Joshua.

Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ,

Joses;

1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἰησοῦς

Iesous

of Hebrew origin (3091); Jesus (i.e. Jehoshua), the name of our Lord

and two (three) other Israelites:--Jesus.

see HEBREW for 03091

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἰησοῦς, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

Jesus

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Ἰησοῦς Iēsous 917x

a Savior, Jesus, Mt. 1:21, 25; 2:1, et al. freq.; Joshua, Acts 7:45; Heb. 4:8; Jesus, a Jewish Christian, Col. 4:11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

Ἰησοῦς Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

je'-zus (Iesous, for yehoshua`):

(1) Joshua, son of Nun (the King James Version Ac 7:45; Heb 4:8; compare 1 Macc 2:55; 2 Esdras 7:37).

(2) (3) High priest and Levite.

See JESHUA, 2, 5.

(4) Son of Sirach.

See SIRACH.

(5) An ancestor of Jesus (Lu 3:29, the King James Version "Jose").

(6) (7) See the next three articles.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Jesus

(1.) Joshua, the son of Nun (Acts 7:45; Heb. 4:8; R.V., “Joshua”).

(2.) A Jewish Christian surnamed Justus (Col. 4:11).

Je’sus, the proper, as Christ is the official, name of our Lord. To distinguish him from others so called, he is spoken of as “Jesus of Nazareth” (John 18:7), and “Jesus the son of Joseph” (John 6:42).

This is the Greek form of the Hebrew name Joshua, which was originally Hoshea (Num. 13:8, 16), but changed by Moses into Jehoshua (Num. 13:16;

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

savior; deliverer

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%jesus
jesus99% · 979×other renderings1% · 9×

988 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject56%adverbial23%object14%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςδέbut, on the otheἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
Χριστόςanointed, the Messia
ἐνArticle theκαίand, even, also,
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
ἐγώ
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastἀποστέλλωI send forth, seὁμολογίαa profession, co
ἸησοῦςJesus913×
what comes after →
Χριστόςanointed, the Messia
Article theκαίand, even, also,εἰς
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastΝαζωραῖοςNazareneυἱόςa son, descenden
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theοὐNeg
καίand, even, also, nam
λέγωI say, speakArticle theὁράωI see, look upon
εἰς
Article theἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemχωρίονa place, piece o

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceἸησοῦς · 913× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke Mark Acts Romans 1 Corinthians Philippians Ephesians 2 Corinthians Galatians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 43 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Drunkenness 96c. AD 40

λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „ἀκούσας Ἰησοῦς τῆς φωνῆς τοῦ λαοῦ κεκραγότων εἶπε πρὸς Μωυσῆν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.49c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῆς πληθύος ἀποκρίνας πᾶν τὸ μάχιμον Ἰησοῦν ἐφίστησιν αὐτῷ Ναυήκου μὲν υἱὸν φυλῆς τῆς Ἐφραιμίτιδος, ἀνδρειότατον δὲ καὶ πόνους ὑποστῆναι γενναῖον καὶ νοῆσαί τε καὶ εἰπεῖν ἱκανώτατον καὶ θρησκεύοντα τὸν θεὸν ἐκπρεπῶς καὶ Μωυσῆν διδάσκαλον τῆς…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.6c. AD 100

ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Got. 60Arsinoites (?)AD 591–AD 602

οτο Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ … … ιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου … … Τιβερίου τοῦ ωηις

Tyche 21 (2006), p. 1-10OxyrhynchosAD 599

r ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου καὶ δεσπότου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν. ὑπατείας τοῦ αὐτοῦ εὐσεβεστάτου ἡμῶν δεσπότου ἔτους ιϛ,

P.Rain.Cent. 120ArsinoitesAD 612

r ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου καὶ δεσπότου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν. Βασιλείας τοῦ εὐσεβεστάτου καὶ φιλανθρώπου ἡμῶν δεσπότου Φλαουίου

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ἀνεχώρησενanachōreō withdrew G402 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
14× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To leave or withdraw from a place, often to avoid danger, as seen in Matthew 2:12 and 14. This word means to go back or retire. It's used to describe physical departure.
Amplified meaning
departed, went away
Tyndale gloss
to leave
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀναχωρέω (i.e., *anachōreō*) means to go back or withdraw, often used in contexts of retreating from danger or leaving a place. It appears in several New Testament passages, including Matthew and Acts, where it conveys the idea of departing or avoiding confrontation. The lexicons consistently emphasize its use in both literal and metaphorical senses, but they do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀνα-χωρέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX for בּרח, נוּם, etc.;]

to go back.

to withdraw: Mt 9:24; freq. in sense of avoiding danger (MM, VGT, s.v.), Mt 2:12 (but v. Thayer), 13, 14, 22 4:12 12:15 14:13 15:21 27:5, Mk 3:7, Jo 6:15, Ac 23:19 26:31.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀνα-χωρέω, -ῶ; 1 aor. ἀνεχώρησα; (freq. in Grk. writ.) ; 1. to go back, return: Mt. ii. 12 sq. [al. refer this to next head]. 2. towithdraw; a. univ., so as to leave room: Mt. ix. 24. b. of those who through fear seek some other place, or shun sight: Mt. ii. 14, 22; iv.12; xii. 15; xiv. 13; xv. 21; xxvii. 5; Mk. iii. 7; Jn. vi. 15 [Tdf. φεύγει}; Acts xxiii. 19 (κατ᾽ ἰδίαν) ; xxvi. 31.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀναχωρέω is applied to the ‘‘ falling” of the Nile in P Magd τ115 (B.C. 221) τοῦ ὕδατος ἀναχωροῦντος, as is the substantive in P Petr IT. 13 (19)® (c. B.c. 252) (= Witkowski, p. 19) τὴ]ν ἀνα[χώ]ρησιν τοῦ ποταμοῦ. In the census return BGU II. 4475 (A.D. 173-4) the name of a man is included who was at the time ἐν ἀναχωρήσι, “away from home” (‘‘ bleibende Entfernung,” Wessely Aarazis, p. 34). See Wilcken Ostr. i. p. 448, and for the same meaning of “absence” cf. P Tebt Il. 353° (A.D. 192) ἀπ᾽ ἀναχωρήσεως κατισεληλυθώς. In P Tebt I. 41 (c. B.c. 119) certain βασιλικοὶ γεωργοί petition against one Marres, stating that on account of his extortion they had gone on strike and taken refuge in the neighbouring villages—-dvakexwpyjkapey εἰς τὰς περιοίκας κώμας: cf. P Oxy IT. 2525 (a.p. 19-20) ἀνεχώρησεν [εἰς τὴν] ξένην, Sy// 802"? (jii/B.c.) τοῦτο ποιήσας εἰς τὸ ἄβατον ἀνεχώρησε, and the late Silco…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀναχωρέω (anachōreō) — to leave.

ἀναχωρ-έω,

Locrian dialect, Cretan dialect ἀνχ-, go back, πόλινδε ἂψ ἀναχωρήσουσιν[Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b walk backwards, of oxen feeding, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. in [Refs 8th c.BC+], mostly, retire, withdraw from battle, ἀλλά σ᾽ ἔγωγ᾽ ἀναχωρήσαντα κελεύω ἐς πληθὺν ἰέναι[Refs 8th c.BC+]; generally, retire, withdraw, μεγάροιο μυχόνδε[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀνεκεχωρήκεσαν they had retired or returned, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: with Preps. denoting motion to or from, ἐς τὴν ἀκρόπολιν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑπὸ Βοιωτῶν ἐς Ἀθήνας were forced by them to retire to.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. come back or revert to the rightful heir, ἡ βασιληΐη ἀνεχώρησε ἐς τὸν παῖδα[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀναχωρέω

anachoreo

from 303 and 5562; to retire:--depart, give place, go (turn) aside,

withdraw self.

see GREEK for 303

see GREEK for 5562

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀναχωρέω

v.

I return, retire, depart, withdraw

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀναχωρέω anachōreō 14x

to go backward; to depart, go away, Mt. 2:12; to withdraw, retire, Mt. 9:24; Acts 23:19; 26:31

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀναχωρέω to go back, Hom.: esp. to retire or withdraw from battle, Hom., Hdt., attic

to retire from a place, c. gen., Od.

to come back or revert to the rightful owner, ἐς τὸν παῖδα Hdt.

. to withdraw from the world, Ar., Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
36%withdrew
withdrew36% · 5×he withdrew29% · 4×having withdrawn14% · 2×they withdrew7% · 1×when were withdrawing7% · 1×do go away7% · 1×

14 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb93%adverbial7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 14 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
νύξthe night, nightχιλίαρχοςa military tribu
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article the
ὁδόςa way, road, journey
ἄλλοςother, another,
ὄναρindcl
κατά
παραδίδωμιI hand over, deliver
ἸωάννηςJohn
ἀναχωρέωwithdrew14×
what comes after →
εἰς
Article theΑἴγυπτοςEgypt
ἐκεῖθενthence, from that pl
καίand, even, also,ἐν
δέbut, on the other ha
αὐτός
οὐNeg
γάρfor
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀπέρχομαιI come or go awa

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀναχωρέω · 14× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts John Mark
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 35c. AD 40

ἐπεὶ δὲ φῶς μὲν ἐγένετο, σκότος δ’ ὑπεξέστη καὶ ἀνεχώρησεν, ὅροι δ’ ἐν τοῖς μεταξὺ διαστήμασιν ἐπάγησαν ἑσπέρα καὶ πρωΐα, κατὰ τἀναγκαῖον τοῦ χρόνου μέτρον ἀπετελεῖτο εὐθύς, ὃ καὶ ἡμέραν ὁ ποιῶν ἐκάλεσε, καὶ ἡμέραν οὐχὶ πρώτην, ἀλλὰ μίαν, ἣ λέλεκται…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.260c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τοιούτου πάλιν ἐκ μεταβολῆς τῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ βασκάνου πειραθεὶς Ἀβιμελέχου τότε μὲν ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὴν λεγομένην Φάραγγα χωρίον οὐ μακρὰν Γεράρων, ὀρύσσοντι δʼ αὐτῷ φρέαρ ποιμένες ἐπιπεσόντες εἰς μάχην ἐχώρησαν κωλύοντες τὸ ἔργον, καὶ μὴ βουληθέντος…

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 2.1.4c. AD 140

ἔλαβον ἐγώ, καὶ εἴς τινα τόπον τοῦ ἀγροῦ ἀναχωρήσας μετεγραψάμην πάντα πρὸς γράμμα: οὐχ ηὕρισκον γὰρ τὰς συλλαβάς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. AD
P.Oxy. 33 2669OxyrhynchosAD 41–AD 54

ὁ ἀπογραφόμενος εἰς τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν ἡμῖν μητρικὴν οἰκίαν ἐπὶ λαύρας χηνοβοσκῶν Ὀρσενοῦφις Μεγχεῦς χαλκοτύπος ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὴν ξένην ἔτι πρὸ πλείονος χρόνου πόρον μὴ ἔχων. καὶ ὀμνύομεν Τιβέριον Κλαύδιον

P.Oxy. Hels. 13Apollonopolites oder EileithyiopolitesAD 1–AD 100

ἐν τῶι καιρῶι τῆς κατασπορᾶς, προσδεόμενος λαβεῖν μετόχους γεωργοὺς εἰς τὴν αὐτὴν γεωργίαν ἐπεὶ ἀνεχώρησαν οἱ περυσινοὶ γεωργοὶ ὥστε μόνος εἰμι, ἵνʼ ἰσχύσω τὰ δημόσια τελεῖν τῶι ταμείωι πρὸς

Stud.Pal. 22 33AD 1–AD 100

πάτερ ὅτι πολλὴ θνῆσις γέγονεν ἐνθάδε ἐπʼ ἐφέτους καὶ οἱ πλείονες τῶν παρʼ ἡμῶν ἀνεχώρησαν … α δὲ τοὺς … οὐδὲν ἔχω … παρακαλῶ … γενναίως … γενοῦ

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ἐκεῖθενekeithen from there G1564 Adverb
27× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
From that place, or 'thence', is what this word means, as seen in Matthew 4:21. It's used to show where someone or something comes from. The Bible uses it to describe movement and origin.
Tyndale gloss
from there
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκεῖθεν (i.e., *ekeithen*) is an adverb meaning 'thence' or 'from that place.' It is used in the New Testament to indicate both physical location and time, as seen in verses like Matthew 4:21 and Mark 6:1. The word is derived from ἐκεῖ (i.e., *eke*) and has various applications in classical literature, often contrasting with ἐκεῖσε.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκεῖθεν

adv.,

[in LXX chiefly for מׅשָׁם ;]

of place, thence: Mt 4:21, Mk 6:1, al.

Of time, thereafter (v.s. κἀκεῖθεν).

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκεῖθεν, adv. of place, thence, from that place, [A. V. sometimes from thence]: Mt. iv. 21; Mk. vi. 1; Lk. ix. 4; Jn. iv. 43; Acts xiii.4; and often in the historical bks. of the N. T. οἱ ἐκεῖθεν elliptically for οἱ ἐκεῖθεν διαβῆναι θέλοντες, Lk. xvi. 26 (where L WH om. oi).

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκεῖθεν (= Selections, p. 103) the word is used somewhat pleonastically—memAdvykay ἡμῶς (ἡμᾶς) ἐκε[1], τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ ὅτι (1. ὅτε) ἔπλευσες, ‘they deceived us there on the 12th, the day you sailed.” For the laxer use = ἐκεῖσε, as in Rom. 15**, cf. P Meyer 208 (1st half iii/A.D.) ἵνα ἐκεῖ πέμπω τὰς ἔπιστολάς. For a contrast with ἐνταῦθα, see Prezsigke 100219 f. (time of Diocletian ἢ) τὰ ἐκεῖ θαύματ[α] εἶδον kal τὰ ἐνταῦθα. The word is MGr.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκεῖθεν (ekeithen) — from there.

ἐκεῖθεν,

poetry κεῖθεν (the only form used by [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Aeolic dialect κήνοθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Doric dialect τηνῶθεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τηνῶθε [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:— adverb from that place, thence, opposed to ἐκεῖσε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a person, τἀκεῖθεν εἰ ποθούμεθα on his part, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. ={ἐκεῖ}, οἱ ἐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+] on yon side of the grove, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. by attraction for ἐκεῖσε, βῆναι κεῖθεν ὅθενπερ ἥκει [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. thence, from that fact, γνοίη δ᾽ ἄν τις ἐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

III. of Time, thenceforward, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκεῖθεν

ekeithen

from 1563; thence:--from that place, (from) thence, there.

see GREEK for 1563

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκεῖθεν

Adv

thence, from that place

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκεῖθεν ekeithen 37x

from there, Mt. 4:21; 5:26

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκεῖθεν from ἐκεῖ from that place, thence, Lat. illinc, opp. to ἐκεῖσε, Soph., etc.

= ἐκεῖ, Aesch., Thuc.:—c. gen., τοὐκεῖθεν ἄλσους on yon side of the grove, Soph.

thence, from that fact, Isocr., Dem.

of Time, thereafter, next, Il.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
96%from there
from there96% · 27×there4% · 1×

28 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 27 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come out
μήNegκαίand, even, also,ἄνDisj
μεταβαίνωI leave, depart, rem
καίand, even, also,αὐτός
καίand, even, also, nam
μένωI remain, abideἐντεῦθενhence, from this
ἀναχωρέωI return, retire, de
γινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus
προβαίνωI go forward
καίand, even, also,
ἐκεῖθενfrom there27×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusδιδάσκωI teach
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
ἄλλοςother, another, ἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
ἕωςuntil, as far as
ἄνDisjκαίand, even, also,
ἔρχομαιI come, go
εἰς
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀκολουθέωI accompany, attἔρχομαιI come, go

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκεῖθεν · 27× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark Acts Luke John Revelation
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 65 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Didache The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Posterity of Cain 76c. AD 40

„ἀναστὰς ἀπόδραθι εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν εἰς τὸν οἶκον Βαθουὴλ πατρὸς τῆς μητρός σου, καὶ λάβε σεαυτῷ ἐκεῖθεν γυναῖκα ἐκ τῶν θυγατέρων Λάβαν ἀδελφοῦ τῆς μητρός σου“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς ἐκεῖθεν ἄρας Μωυσῆς ἤγαγεν εἰς τοὺς ὅρους τῶν Χαναναίων καὶ τοὺς κατοψομένους αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν καὶ τῶν πόλεων τὸ μέγεθος ἐξαπέστειλεν.

The DidacheThe Didache 1.5c. AD 100

οὐαὶ τῷ λαμβάνονται: εἰ μὲν γὰρ χρείαν ἔχων λαμβάνει τις, ἀθῷος ἔσται: ὁ δὲ μὴ χρείαν ἔχων δώσει δίκην, ἱνατί ἔλαβε καὶ εἰς τί: ἐν συνοχῇ δὲ γενόμενος ἐξετασθήσεται περὶ ὧν ἔπραξε, καὶ οὐκ ἐξελεύσεται ἐκεῖθεν, μέχρις οὗ ἀποδῷ τὸν ἔσχατον κοδράντην.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
O.Did. 319DidymoiAD 77–AD 92

Ἰούλις Οὐαλερίῳ τῷ ἀδελφῷ χαίρειν. ἔπεμψά σοι ἐπιστολὰς τέσσαρας διὰ τοῦ γαλεαρίου τοῦ ἐκεῖθεν ἀπὸ Διδύμων καὶ διὰ Κορνηλίου γαλεαρίου ἄλλας γ ὥστε ζ. εἰ ἔλαβες, ἀντίγραψον πόσας

P.Mich. 8 486AD 101–AD 200

ἐπιστεῖλαι ἐμοὶ μᾶλλον προσεχέστερον ἐπέστειλας, φημὶ ὅτι χρείας ἐπειγούσης εἰς Ἀντινόου μελλήσω ἀνέρχεσθαι καὶ ἐκεῖθεν ἐπιστελῶ πρὸς σὲ τούτων χάριν. εἰ δέ πως Τύχη ἀπʼ Ἀντινόου με πάλιν ἐνθάδε

P.Mich. 8 487RomAD 101–AD 200

Ἀπολλινάριος Σεμπρωνίωι τῶι τιμιωτάτωι ἀδελφῶι χαίρειν. γενάμενος ἐν Ῥώμῃ ἐπέγνων σε ἐκεῖθεν, ἐξεληλυθέναι πρὸ τοῦ με ἐλθεῖν, καὶ λίαν ἐλυπήθην διὰ τὸ μὴ τεθεωρηκέναι σε. ἀλλὰ

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ἐνen by G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

In the sense of "against" which survives only in dialectal English (compare Wright, Dialect Dict., I, 470, for examples) is the King James Version rendering of the dative emauto of 1Co 4:4 (the American Standard Revised Version renders this "against"). In classical Greek the same idiom sunoida with dative = "be conscious" or "be cognizant of" a thing.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

By

In the expression “by myself” (A.V., 1 Cor. 4:4), means, as rendered in the Revised Version, “against myself.”

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%in
in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg
ἐγώ
μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς
ἐνby2743×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theμένωI remain, abide
σύ
εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
πλοίῳploion boat G4143 Noun · dative · singular · neuter
67× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word refers to a boat or ship, like the ones mentioned in Matthew 4:21-22 where Jesus calls his disciples. It's a vessel for sailing or traveling on water, used for transportation or fishing. This word is commonly used in the Gospels and Acts.
Amplified meaning
a ship, vessel
Tyndale gloss
boat
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πλοῖον (ploion) refers to a vessel or ship, derived from the verb meaning 'to sail.' It encompasses various types of boats, including merchant ships and small craft, and is frequently used in the New Testament, notably in Matthew 4:21-22 and Acts 21:2-3. The term has historical usage in classical literature as well.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πλοῖον, -ου, τό

(< πλέω),

[in LXX chiefly for אֳנִיָּה;]

a boat, also (= obsol. ναῦς) a ship: Mt 4:21, 22, and freq. in Gosp. and Ac, Ja 3:4, Re 8:9 18:19.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πλοῖον, -ov, τό, (πλέω), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. chiefly for TAIN, α ship: Mt. iv. 21, 22; Mk.i.19; Lk. v.2;>RGL txt. Tr txt. WH txt.]; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xx. 13, and often in the historical bks. of the N. T.; Jas. iii. 4; Rev. viii. 9; xviii. 19. [BB.DD. s.v. Ship.] πλόος -ovs, gen. -dov -ov, and in later writ. mods (Acts xxvii. 9; Arr. peripl. erythr. p. 176 § 61; see νοῦς [and cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 173 sq.]), (πλέω), fr. Hom. Od. 3, 169 down; voyage: Acts xxi. 7; xxvii. 9, 10, (Sap. xiv. 1).

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πλοῖον, “‘boat.” For this common word, which comes to be used for ‘‘ship’’ (Ac 2018) owing to the almost complete disappearance of ναῦς, cf. P Leid U* ὁ (ii/s.c.) (=I. p. 123, UPZ i. p. 370) ἔδοξεν kar’ ἐνύπνον (/. ἐνύπνιον) πλοῖον παπύρινον, ὃ καλεῖται ἀγυπτιστεὶ ῥώψ, προσορμῆσαι εἰς Μέμφιν, P Hib I. 152 (c. B.c. 250) ἐμβαλοῦ εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἅλας καὶ λωτὸν ὅπως ἔχωσιν [οἱ] ναυπηγοί, P Ryl II. 2291} (a.b. 38) ἐρωτῶ σε ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου εὐθέως μοι πέμψαι... τὸ ὀψάριον, ἐπεὶ ἐν πλοίῳ εἰμί, “1 ask you therefore to do your utmost to send me the relish, as I am on board a boat,” P Oxy I. 36%-8 (ii/ili a.p.) €[av] δὲ τελώνης ἐκφορ[τισθ]ῆναι τὸ πλοῖον ἐπιζητήσῃ, ‘but if the tax-farmer desire that the ship should be unloaded” (Edd.) (cf. Ac 218), and 26. XIV. 1763* (after A.D. 222) οὔπω μέχρι σήμερον τὰ πλοῖα τῆς avwvas ἐξῆλθεν. For the form cf. 74. 1773}2 (iii/A.b.) ἀ]νῆλθα χάριν πλύον καὶ οὐκ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πλοῖον (ploion) — boat.

πλοῖον, τό,

(πλέω) properly floating vessel: hence, generally, ship, [Refs 5th c.BC+] small craft, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. ἁλιευτικόν a fishing-boat, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἱππαγωγὰ π. transports for horses, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. μακρά ships of war, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. στρογγύλα or φορτηγικά ships of burden, merchantmen, [Refs 5th c.BC+] without adjective, mostly merchant-ship or transport, as opposed to ship of war, τοῖς π. καὶ ταῖς ναυσί [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλεῖν μὴ μακρᾷ νηΐ, ἄλλῳ δὲ κωπήρει πλοίῳ Foed.[Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλοῖα alone, ={τριήρεις}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πλοῖον

ploion

from 4126; a sailer, i.e. vessel:--ship(-ing).

see GREEK for 4126

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πλοῖον, ου, τό

n.n.

a ship, vessel

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πλοῖον ploion 67x

a vessel, ship, bark, whether large or small, Mt. 4:21, 22; Acts 21:2, 3

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πλοῖον πλοῖον, ου, τό, πλέω a floating vessel, a ship, vessel, Hdt., Aesch., etc.; πλοῖα λεπτά small craft, Hdt., Thuc.; πλ. ἱππαγωγά transport- vessels, Hdt.; πλ. μακρά ships of war, id. Hdt.; πλ. στρογγύλα or φορτηγικά ships burthen, merchantmen, Xen.:—when opp. to ναῦς, a merchant-ship or transport, τοῖς πλοίοις καὶ ταῖς ναυσί Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DSN — Noun · dative · singular · neuter
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

bot.

See SHIPS AND BOATS.

Nave's Topical Bible

→ See SHIP

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
65%boat
boat65% · 44×ship22% · 15×boats7% · 5×ships4% · 3×other renderings1% · 1×

68 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial61%subject19%object15%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 67 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςἐνἐκ
εἰς
ἐμβαίνωI embarkαὐτός
ἐν
ἐκεῖθενthence, from thaἀνάγωI lead up, put t
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theἐπιβαίνωI step on, mount
ἄλλοςother, another, diff
καίand, even, also,
πλοῖονboat67×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπροάγωI lead forth, goἔρχομαιI come, go
μετά
Article theΖεβεδαῖοςZebedee
διαπεράωI cross over
καίand, even, also,εἰς
ἐμβαίνωI embark
κάθημαιI sit, am seated
εἰς
ἔρημοςdeserted, desola

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπλοῖον · 67× in the New Testament
Acts Mark Matthew Luke John Revelation James
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 23 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaThat the Worse Attacks the Better 144c. AD 40

ἡ μὲν γὰρ ἄφεσις αὐτοὺς ὥσπερ ἀνερμάτιστα καὶ ἀκυβέρνητα πλοῖα ῥᾷστα ἀνατρέψει, ἡ δὲ κόλασις ἐπανορθώσεται.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.93c. AD 75–95

λέγεται δὲ καὶ τοῦ πλοίου ἐν τῇ Ἀρμενίᾳ πρὸς τῷ ὄρει τῶν Κορδυαίων ἔτι μέρος τι εἶναι καὶ κομίζειν τινὰς τῆς ἀσφάλτου ἀφαιροῦντας·

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC

r … πωλουμένων πλοίων … ἀγοράζειν εὕρωσι … τεταμένα καὶ ταῖς … … υν … Κασιωτικοῦ … παντὸς

PSI 4 437Philadelphia? (Arsinoites)247 BC

r Σπίνθηρ Ζήνωνι χαίρειν. γίνωσκε ἡμᾶς οἰκονομηκότας τὰ περὶ τὰ σκεύη τοῦ πλοίου, ἐπιστόλια εἰληφότας εἰς Μέμφιν καὶ εἰς Ἑρμοῦ πόλιν. ὡς δὲ περιορμίσαι ἠμέλλομεν, ἀντελάβοντο ἡμῶν

P.Grenf. 2 23Latopolites109 BC

ἀπὸ τῆς ἐν Παθύρει τραπέζης, συνυπογράφοντος Φίβιος τοῦ βασιλικοῦ γραμματέως, τοῖς ἐπὶ τῶν δηλουμένων πλοίων ἑκάστου χαλκοῦ τάλαντα τριάκοντα τέσσαρα γίνονται … τάλαντα λδ καὶ σύμβολον καὶ ἀντισύμβολον ποίησαι

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
εἰςeis to G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςto1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ἔρημονerēmos a secluded G2048 Adjective · accusative · singular · masculine
47× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Deserted means being alone or uninhabited, like the desert where Jesus often went, as mentioned in Matthew 14:13 and Mark 1:36.
Amplified meaning
deserted, uninhabited
Tyndale gloss
deserted
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἔρημος (i.e. *eremos*) means solitary or desolate, often referring to deserted places or people. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 14:13 and Galatians 4:27. The term can also denote a wilderness or uninhabited region, as seen in Matthew 3:1. Lexicons agree on its meanings, emphasizing its use for both physical and metaphorical desolation.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἔρημος

(in older Gk. ἔρῆμος), -ον

[in LXX chiefly for מִדְבָּר ;]

solitary, lonely, desolate, deserted:

of persons, γυνή, Ga 4:27 (LXX);

of places, Mt 14:13, 15 23:38 (WH, om.), Mk 1:36 6:32, Lk 4:42 9:12, al.; as subst., ἡ ἔ. (sc. χώρα; as in Hdt., ii, 32, al.), the desert, Mt 3:1, 3, Mk 1:3, 4, Jo 3:14, al.; pl., αἱ ἔ., desert places, Lk 1:80 5:16 8:29

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἔρημος, -ov, (in classic Grk. also-os, -n, -ov, ef. W. § 11, 1; [B. 25 (23); on its accent οἵ. Chandler 88 393, 394; W. 52 (51)]); 1. adj. solitary, lonely, desolate, uninhabited : of places, Mt. xiv. 13, 15; Mk. i. 35; vi. 32; Lk. iv. 42; ix.10[RGL], 12; Acts i. 20,ete.; ἡ ὁδός, leading through a desert, Acts viii. 26 (2 S. ii. 24 Sept.), see Γάζα, sub fin. of persons: deserted by others; deprived of the aid and protection of others, esp. of friends, acquaintances, kindred ; bereft; (so often by Grk. writ. of every age, as Aeschyl. Ag. 862; Pers. 734; Arstph. pax 112; ἔρημός τε καὶ ὑπὸ πάντων καταλειφθείς, Hdian. 2, 12, 12 [7 ed. Bekk.]; of a flock deserted-by the shepherd, Hom. II. 5, 140) : γυνή, ἃ woman neglected by her husband, from whom the husband withholds himself, Gal. iv. 27, fr. Is. liv.1; of Jerusalem, bereft of Christ’s presence, instruction and aid, Mt. xxiii. 38 {L and WH…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἔρημος. P Lille I. 263 (iii/B.c.) ἡ κώμη ἔρημος διὰ τὸ πλείω χρόνον μὴ βεβρέχθαι, “the village deserted because for long there has been no inundation,” P Tebt II. 3084 (A.D. 174) ἐρήμου αἰγιαλοῦ, ““ desert shore,” OG/S 5807 (A.D. 367-75) τὸν τόπον. . . πρότερον ἀγνοούμενον καὶ ἔρημον. For the legal use of the adj. to denote judgment going ‘‘ by default” owing to the non-appearance of the accused party, cf. P Hib I. 328 (B.c. 246) Νεοπτολέμου Μακεδόνος ἰδιώτου τ[ῶν] ᾿Αντιόχου πρὸς καταδίκην ἔρημον ὕβρεως πρὸς (δραχμάς) σ, ‘‘(property of) Neoptolemus, Macedonian, a private in Antiochus’ troop, who had been condemned by default for violence to a fine of 200 drachmae” (Edd.): cf. Crest. II. i. p-18n.3 On the accent of ἔρημος see Brugmann-Thumb Gr. p. 185. The adj. survives in MGr = ‘“‘lonely,” ‘* forsaken”: cf. also the Klepht ballad, Abbott Songs, p. 1813, where τἄρημα τ᾽ ἄρματα τἄρημα τὰ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἔρημος (erēmos) — deserted.

ἐρῆμος, ον,

feminine ἐρήμη [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Attic dialect ἔρημος, ον, accusative to Hdn.Gr.[Refs]: comparative -ότερος [Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative -ότατος[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—desolate, lonely, solitary,

1. of places, ἐς νῆσον ἐρήμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὰ ἐ. τῆς Λιβύης the desert parts.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ἐρῆμος (i.e. χώρα) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; empty, πνύξ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. of personsor animals, τὰ δ᾽ ἐρῆμα φοβεῖται (i.e. the sheep), [Refs 8th c.BC+]; frequently of poor, friendless persons, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐρημότεροι, opposed to δυνατώτεροι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]solitary, not gregarious, [Refs 1st c.AD+] adverb, ἔρημα κλαίω I weep in solitude, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἔρημον ἐμβλέπειν to look vacantly, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἔρημος

eremos

of uncertain affinity; lonesome, i.e. (by implication) waste (usually

as a noun, 5561 being implied):--desert, desolate, solitary,

wilderness.

see GREEK for 5561

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἔρημος, ον

Adj

deserted, desolate, a desert

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἔρημος erēmos 48x

lone, desert, waste, uninhabited, Mt. 14:13, 15; Mk. 6:31, 32, 35; lone, abandoned to ruin, Mt. 23:38; Lk. 13:35; met. lone, unmarried, Gal. 4:27; as a subst. a desert, uninhabited region, waste, Mt. 3:1; 24:26; Acts 7:36

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASM — Adjective · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
62%wilderness
wilderness62% · 31×solitary12% · 6×desolate10% · 5×desert2% · 1×desolate woman2% · 1×wilderness?2% · 1×secluded2% · 1×desolate!2% · 1×other renderings6% · 3×

50 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 11 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial79%predicate19%subject2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 47 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνεἰςἐγγύςnear
εἰς
πλοῖονa ship, vesselἀπέρχομαιI come or go awaἴδιοςone’s own, priva
λέγωI say, speak
μαθητήςa learner, disci
ἐπί
ἔξωwithout, outside
ὅτιthat, since, because
λέγωI say, speak
ἔρημοςa secluded47×
what comes after →
τόποςa place
κατάεἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,
Article the
ἸουδαίαJudeaμάνναHebrὄροςa mountain
ἑτοιμάζωI make ready, prepar
Article the
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμήNeg
καίand, even, also, nam
προσεύχομαιI pray, pray forπορεύομαιI travel, journeμήNeg

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἔρημος · 47× in the New Testament
Luke Acts Mark Matthew John Revelation Hebrews 1 Corinthians Galatians
Across the New Testament9 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 247 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.64c. AD 40

οὔτε ὁ νοῦς ἐνόει οὔτε ἡ αἴσθησις ᾐσθάνετο, ἀλλ’ ἦν ὁ μὲν τοῦ νοεῖν ἔρημός τε καὶ γυμνός, ἡ δὲ τοῦ αἰσθάνεσθαι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.189c. AD 75–95

ὑπαντιάζει δὲ διὰ τῆς ἐρήμου προϊοῦσαν αὐτὴν ἄγγελος θεῖος κελεύων πρὸς τοὺς δεσπότας ἐπανιέναι·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.8c. AD 100

Καὶ ἐμπτύσατε πάντες καὶ κατακεντήσατε καὶ περίθετε τὸ ἔριον τὸ κόκκινον περὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὕτως εἰς ἔρημον βληθήτω.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. BC
P. Lond. 2 p. 96-97 no. 256 Ro ePtolemais Euergetis bzw. Lysimachis (Arsinoites)AD 11

καιρῶι πυρῶι καὶ τοῖς ἁρμόζουσι καὶ … … σι γένεσι καὶ μηδεμίαν ἄρουραν ἐᾶσαι ἔρημον ἢ ἄβροχον ἢ ἔνβροχον παυ … ν … τῆς καθʼ ὁνδηποτεοῦν τρόπον διʼ ἀμέλειαν

P.Coll.Youtie 1 48Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 155

τετελώνηται διὰ πύλης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου ἐρήμου φυλακίας Νεφερῶς Ἁτρῆτος εἰσάγων ἐπὶ ὄνῳ ἑνὶ ἐλαίου μετρητὰς τέσσαρας … … ιχδι

P.Tebt. 2 308Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 174

Αὐρηλίου Ἀντωνίνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Ἁθὺρ ιγ. διέγραψεν Ἀμμωνίῳ καὶ Θέωνι μισθωταῖς δρυμῶν καὶ ἐρήμου αἰγιαλοῦ Πολέμωνος μερίδος Πετεσοῦχος Πετεσούχου ἱερεὺς Τεπτύνεως τιμὴν βίβλου μυριάδων δύο ἐν Ἰβίωνι Ἀργαίου

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
τόπονtopos place G5117 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
95× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for place or location, used in the Bible to describe a specific spot or area, such as a home or a tract of land, as seen in Matthew 24:15 and Luke 10:1. It can also refer to a condition or opportunity. In Acts 12:17, it describes a specific location where Peter went.
Tyndale gloss
place
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τόπος (i.e. *topos*) means 'place' and refers to a specific location or position, whether inhabited or uninhabited. It can also denote metaphorical concepts such as opportunity or condition. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, including physical locations (e.g., Luke 4:37) and metaphorical meanings (e.g., Romans 12:19). The lexicons note its use in both literal and figurative senses without significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τόπος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX chiefly for מָקֹום ;]

place: Lk 4:37 10:1, 32, Jo 5:13 6:10, Ac 12:17, I Co 1:2, al.; τ. ἅγιος (cf. Is 60:13), Mt 24:15; ἔρημος, Mt 14:13, al.; πεδινός, Lk 6:17; ἄνυδρος (pl.), Mt 12:43, Lk 11:24; κατὰ τόπους (EV, in divers places), Mt 24:7, Mk 13:8; τραχεῖς τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τόπος, -ov, 6, in Attic fr. Aeschyl. and his contemporaries on; Sept. DIP; place; i.e. 1. prop. any portion of space marked off, as it were, from surrounding space ; used of a. an inhabited place, as a city, village, district: Lk. iv. 37; x. 1; Acts xii. 17; xvi. 3; xxvii. 2,8; 1Co.i.2; 2Co. ii. 14; 1 ΤῊ. 1. 8; Rev. xviii. 17 [GLT Tr WH]; τὸν τόπον καὶ τὸ ἔθνος, the place which the nation inhabit, i.e. the holy land and the Jewish people, Jn. xi. 48 (cf. 2 Mace. v. 19 sq.) ; τόπος ἅγιος, the temple (which the Sept. of Is. Ix. 13 calls ὁ ἅγιος τόπος τοῦ θεοῦ), Mt. xxiv. 15. of a house, Acts iv. 31. of uninhabited places, with adjectives: ἔρημος, Mt. xiv. 13,15; Mk. i. 35; vi. 31 sq.; Lk. iv. 42; ix. 10 RGL, 12; medwos, Lk. vi. 17; ἄνυδρος, plur., Mt. xii. 43; Lk. xi. 24. of any place whatever: κατὰ τύπους, [R.V. in divers places] i.e. the world over [but see xara, ΤΙ. 3a.a.], Mt. xxiv.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τόπος, (1) “ἃ place”: P Cairo Zen If. 591935 (B.c. 225) ἱππῶνα (‘‘stable”) οὐκ ἔχει ὁ τόπος, P Oxy IV. 7425 (8.6. 2) θ[ἐ]ς αὐτὰς εἰς τόπον ἀσφαλῶς, and BGU II. 5958 (c. A.D. 70-80) elva φιλάνθρωπον (‘reward’’) εἰς δύο τόπους μὴ χορηγῆι Θέων. With τόπος as a ‘‘sitting-place” in Lk 141°, Deissmann (LS, p. 267) compares erg 618, where τόπος means “seat in a theatre” (for further exx. see the editor’s note). See also J/agz. 237 where between the pillars of the temple of Artemis there have been scratched on the marble floor the words—6 τόπος τρικλείνου ἱερῶν αὐλητρίδων καὶ ἀκροβατῶν (cited by Thieme p- 32, comparing 1 Cor 1418). Τόπος is also frequent in Christian (and pagan) sepulchral inserr. as in C. and B. ii. p. 554, No. 426 Τόπος Φιλοθέου], where Ramsay compares the corresponding use of the Lat. locus, Or locudus. With Jn 1148 cf. MGr use of τόπος = “country,” “nation.” (2) ‘a…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τόπος (topos) — place.

τόπος, ὁ

(feminine by attraction τόπον τὰν καλειμέναν Δαματρείαν [Refs 2nd c.BC+], place, region, first in [Refs 4th c.BC+], afterwards frequently in all writers; periphrastic, χθονὸς πᾶς τ., i.e. the whole earth, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐν Ἑλλάδος τόποις in Greece,[Refs]; πρὸς ἑσπέρους τ. towards the West, [Refs]; πρόσθε Σαλαμῖνος τόπων before Salamis, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: so in Prose, district, ὁ τ. ὁ Ἑλληνικός [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ τ. οὗτος, ἐν τούτοις τοῖς τ., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅλος τ. a whole region, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; οἱ τῆς χώρας τ. the places of a country, [Refs] the geographical position, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; region, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ἅγιοστ., of Jerusalem, [LXX]; the universe divided into three τόποι, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; οἱ κοινοὶ τ. public sites or buildings, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; οἰκίαι καὶ τόποι houses and sites, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; so ψιλοὶ τ. sites not…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τόπος

topos

apparently a primary word; a spot (general in space, but limited by

occupancy; whereas 5561 is a large but participle locality), i.e.

location (as a position, home, tract, etc.); figuratively, condition,

opportunity; specially, a scabbard:--coast, licence, place, X plain,

quarter, + rock, room, where.

see GREEK for 5561

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τόπος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a place

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Πόντος Pontos 1x

Pontus, country of Asia Minor, Acts 2:9; 1 Pet. 1:1*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τόπος τόπος, ὁ, a place, Lat. locus, Aesch., etc.; periphr., χθονὸς πᾶς τόπος, i. e. the whole earth, id. Aesch.; Πέλοπος ἐν τόποις in Peloponnesus, id. Aesch., etc.; ὁ τόπος τῆς χώρας the local circumstances of the district, Dem.

place, position, Aeschin.

a place or passage in an author, NTest., etc.

a topic, Aeschin.: a common-place in Rhetoric, Arist.

metaph. a place, occasion, opportunity, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

plas: Normally for maqom, Old Testament, and topos, New Testament, but in the King James Version "place" represents a great number of Hebrew and Greek words, often used with no difference in force (e.g. 2Ch 35:10,15). the Revised Version (British and American) has made few changes, but occasionally has attempted to specialize the meaning (Ge 40:13; Job 37:8; Ac 8:32; Jas 3:11, etc.).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
85%place
place85% · 81×places9% · 9×opportunity2% · 2×other renderings3% · 3×

95 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial53%object19%subject16%predicate13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 95 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςἐνεἰμίI am, exist
ἔρημοςdeserted, desolate,
εἰςἐπίἐν
εἰς
ἔρχομαιI come, goβῆμαthe space covereδέbut, on the othe
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἐνεἰς
κατά
σεισμόςan earthquake, sκαίand, even, also,
τόποςplace95×
what comes after →
Article the
καλέωI call, invite, περίχωροςneighboringπόλιςa city
ὅπουwhere, whither
κεῖμαιI lie, recline, τίθημιI put, placeπροσκυνέωI worship
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἀναπαύωI make to rest, ἤδηnow, already
αὐτός
πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,ἐάνCond
οὗτος
Article theκαίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτόπος · 95× in the New Testament
Luke Acts John Matthew Mark Revelation Hebrews Romans 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians
Across the New Testament14 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 274 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 17c. AD 40

Τὸν δ’ ἐκ τῶν ἰδεῶν συνεστῶτα κόσμον ἐν τόπῳ τινὶ λέγειν ἢ ὑπονοεῖν οὐ θεμιτόν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 16.2c. AD 100

λέγει κύριος: Ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου: ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

γῆ Ὥρου τοῦ Νεχούθου τοῦ ὠνουμένου· ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτοῖς ψιλῶν τόπων ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ λιβὸς μέρει κώμης Μούχεως ἑπταρούρων πήχεις στερεοὺς μέτρῳ βασιλικοὺς τριακοσίους ὧν

P.Bad. 2 16Pathyris89 BC

r … ἐπαινῶ … … τὰ ὑφʼ ὑμῶν κεχειροτονημένα. καλῶς ποιήσετε συνγεινόμενοι εἰς τοῦτον τόπον ἐν ἀσφαλείαι ὑπάρχοντα συντηρηθῆναι τοῦτον τῶι κυρίωι βασιλεῖ· οὕτω γὰρ πράσσοντες καὶ τὴν πρὸς

P.Bour. 10Pathyris89 BC

τὸ συμφέρον τοῖς πράγμασι καὶ γεγραφότες τοῖς κατοικοῦσι συγγίνεσθαί σοι. καλῶς ποιήσεις συντηρῶν τὸν τόπον καὶ προιστάμενος· τοὺς δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
κατ᾽kata apart G2596 Preposition
473× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Matthew than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
According to means following or matching something. In the Bible, it's used to talk about things happening in line with God's plan or will, like in Matthew 8:32 and Mark 5:13.
Tyndale gloss
according to
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

κατά (kata) is a preposition used with the genitive and accusative cases, primarily meaning 'down' or 'against.' It indicates direction, motion, or relation, appearing in various contexts such as 'down from' (e.g., Mt 8:32) and 'against' (e.g., Mk 9:40). The word also conveys meanings like 'throughout' and 'according to.' Lexicons note its frequent use in the New Testament, with some variations in application.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατά (bef. a vowel κατ’, καθ’; on the freq. neglect of elision, v. Tdf., Pr., 95; WH, App., 146a),

prep. c. gen., acc.,

down, downwards.

C. gen. (WM, § 47, k; Bl., § 42, 2).

C. gen. rei, in local sense;

down, down from: Mt 8:32, Mk 5:13, Lk 8:33, I Co 11:4;

throughout (late usage; Bl., § 42, 2): κ. ὅλης κ.τ.λ., Lk 4:14 23:5, Ac 9:31 10:37;

in a peculiar adjectival phrase: ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία, deep or extreme poverty, II Co 8:2.

C. gen. pers., usually in hostile sense;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατά, [on its neglect of elision before a vowel see Tf. Proleg. p. 95; cf. W. § 5, 1a.; B.10; WH. App. p. 1405], a preposition denoting motion or diffusion or direction from the higher to the lower; as in class. Grk., joined with the gen. and the acc. I. With the Genitive (W. § 47, k. p. 381 (357); [B. § 147, 20]); 1. prop. a. down from, down: κατὰ κατά 8 τοῦ κρημνοῦ, Mt. viii. 32; ΜΚ. v.13; Lk. viii. 33; κατέχεεν κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς (so that it flowed down from his head [οἷς W. 381 (357) note]; but it is more correct here to omit κατά with LT Tr WH; see καταχέω), Mk. xiv. 3; hence κατὰ κεφαλῆς (a veil hanging down from his head) ἔχων, 1 Co. xi. 4 ([Δ. V. having his head covered] cf. καταπέτασμα [or rather κάλυμμα (q. v.), but 566 ἔχω I. 1b.]). Ὁ. down upon (down into) anything: Acts xxvii. 14 [W. 381 (357) note!; ef. B.D. Am. ed. s. ν. Crete]; trop. 7 κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία reaching down…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

κατά, the favourite preposition of Polybius, by whom it is often used in place of ἐν, eis, and περί (Krebs Pra. p. 4), is also found with considerable variety of application in the NT, where it occurs 73 times c. gen., and 391 times c. acc. (cf. Proleg. p. 105). Brugmann (Awrze Vergletchende Grammazk, p. 479) considers that the earliest use of the word was “‘along ” something, so as to remain in connexion and contact with the object, and from this most of the senses found in the NT can be derived. I. (1) Turning to the construction c. gen. we find that the meaning ‘‘along” has passed into ‘‘down,” a usage not found in ΜΟΥ, in such passages as P Petr II. 18(26)!° (B.c. a ἐπιπεσὼν ἔτυπτεν [ad]t[o]v κατὰ τοῦ τραχήλου, Chest. τοῦ πνοήν: ἐξ Mt 8%, r Cor 114, 2 Cor 8%. (2) This in turn becomes ‘‘ against,” as in Mt τοῦδ, Mk 14°5, e.g. P Eleph 115 (B.c. 311-0) (= Se/ections, p. 4) ὅπου ἂν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

κατά (kata) — according to.

κατά [κᾰτᾰ],

poetry καταί accusative to [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: preposition with genitive or accusative:— downwards.

__A WITH GEN.,

__A.I denoting motion from above, down from, βῆ δὲ κατ᾽ Οὐλύμποιο καρήνων, κατ᾽ Ἰδαίων ὀρέων, βαλέειν κ. πέτρης, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; καθ᾽ ἵππων ἀΐξαντε[Refs 5th c.BC+] — for κατ᾽ ἄκρης see.{ἄκρα}: Μοῖσα κ. στόματος Χέε νέκταρ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

__A.II denoting downward motion,

__A.II.1 down upon or over, κ. Χθονὸς ὄμματα πήξας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the dying, κατὰ.. ὀφθαλμῶν κέχυτ᾽ ἀχλύς a cloud settled upon the eyes, [Refs]; φᾶρος κὰκ κεφαλῆς εἴρυσσε down over.. , [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [κόπρος] κ. σπείους κέχυτο.. πολλή [Refs]; ὕδωρ κ. Χειρός, see at {Χεί; μύρον κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς καταχέαντες} [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

κατά

kata

a primary particle; (prepositionally) down (in place or time), in

varied relations (according to the case (genitive, dative or

accusative) with which it is joined):--about, according as (to),

after, against, (when they were) X alone, among, and, X apart, (even,

like) as (concerning, pertaining to touching), X aside, at, before,

beyond, by, to the charge of, (charita-)bly, concerning, + covered,

(dai-)ly, down, every, (+ far more) exceeding, X more excellent, for,

from ... to, godly, in(-asmuch, divers, every, -to, respect of), ...

by, after the manner of, + by any means, beyond (out of) measure, X

mightily, more, X natural, of (up-)on (X part), out (of every), over

against, (+ your) X own, + particularly, so, through(-oughout,

-oughout every), thus, (un-)to(-gether, -ward), X uttermost,

where(-by), with. In composition it retains many of these

Read the full entry →
Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

κατά

Prep.

down from, against, according to, throughout, during

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

κατά kata 473x

down from, Mt. 8:32; down upon, upon, Mk. 14:3; Acts 27:14; down into; κατὰ βάθους, profound, deepest, 2 Cor. 8:2; down over, throughout a space, Lk. 4:14; 23:5; concerning, in cases of pointed allegation, 1 Cor. 15:15; against, Mt. 12:30; by, in oaths, Mt. 26:63; with an acc. of place, in the quarter of, about, near, at, Lk. 10;32; Acts 2:10; throughout, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

a-part' (badh, "separation," i.e. alone, by oneself; niddah, "uncleanness" i.e. something put away: "an abomination"): In Zec 12:12-14 the former word is used eleven times with powerful effect to indicate the separation of families and the isolation of wives through excessive grief in Jerusalem on account of the slain Messiah. The latter word signifies removal from ceremonial uncleanness (Le 15:19; 18:19; Eze 22:10). In Greek, kat' idian, "by themselves," of marked significance as expressing Christ's desire for privacy in prayer, alone or with His disciples; either in a desert (Mt 14:13); a mountain (Mt 14:23); or a…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
45%according to
according to45% · 215×against12% · 57×in9% · 42×every5% · 24×by5% · 23×on3% · 13×other renderings15% · 72×other renderings7% · 34×

480 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 48 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial86%object5%predicate5%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 473 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, ἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
ποιέωI do, makeγυνήa woman, wife, mλαλέωI speak, say
καίand, even, also, nam
ἑκατόνIndecμέγαςσύ
οὐNeg
καίand, even, also,ἀλλάbut, exceptἔρχομαιI come, go
ἐγώ
μετάσυλλαμβάνωI seize, appreheγίνομαιI come into bein
κατάapart473×
what comes after →
Article the
νόμοςa law, the Mosaiἔργονwork, labor, actαὐτός
σάρξflesh, body
περιπατέωI walk, conduct ζάωI liveοὐNeg
ἴδιοςone’s own, private,
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,δέbut, on the othe
ἡμέραa day
ἐνεἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,
αὐτός
ὅπωςhow, in order thκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκατά · 473× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Luke Hebrews Matthew 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Ephesians Mark Galatians Colossians Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 6th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐπρίατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς Πανοβχούνιος ὡς ἐτῶν μ χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δύο . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πετεαρσεμθεὺς ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ἐπρίατο Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος ὡς ἐτῶν λ χαλκοῦ δραχμῶν τρισχιλίων . προπωληταὶ καὶ βεβαιωταὶ τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Νεχούτης καὶ ὁ σὺν αὐτῷ οἱ ἀποδόμενοι, ὃν ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις

BGU 3 1000Pathyris99 BC

μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς δισχιλίας καὶ διακοσίας . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πανοβχοῦνις ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν ἐδέξατο Εὔνους ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ἰδίαν.idios [on his] own. G2398 Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
113× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Something that is one's own is private or personal, like in Matthew where Jesus is alone with his disciples.
Amplified meaning
quiet place
Tyndale gloss
one's own/private
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἴδιος (i.dios) means 'one's own' or 'private.' It conveys a sense of personal ownership or belonging, often contrasting with what is public or shared. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts referring to personal property, family, and private matters, such as in John 1:11 and Galatians 6:5. The word can also imply distinctiveness or peculiarity, as seen in various classical texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἴδιος, -α, -ον (in Attic usually -ος, -ον),

[in LXX chiefly for pers. suff., also for לָהֶם, etc.; (τὰ ἴ.) בֵּיתוֹ;]

one's own;

of that which is private and personal (in cl. opp. to κοινός, δημόσιος; cf. infr. 3);

of property, friends, home, country, etc. (in cl. opp. to ἀλλότριος; in late writers often, like ἑαυτοῦ, with weakened sense, v. M, Pr., 87 ff.; Deiss., BS, 123 f.): Lk 6:41, Jo 1:42 5:43, Ac 2:6 20:28, I Co 11:21, Ga 6:5, II Ti 1:9, He 7:27, Ju 6, al.; πράσσειν τὰ ἴ., I…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἴδιος, -a, -ov, (in prof. auth. [esp. Attic] also of two term.), [fr. Hom. down]; 1. pertaining to one’s self, one’s own; used a. univ. of what is one’s own as opp. to belonging to another: τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα, Jn. x. 3 sq. 12; τὰ ἱμάτια τὰ ἴδια, Mk. xv. 20 RG Tr (for which T τὰ ἴδ. in. αὐτοῦ, L WII τὰ ig. αὐτοῦ); τὸ ἴδιον (for his own use) κτῆνος, Lk. x. 34; διὰ τοῦ ἰδίου αἵματος, Heb. ix. 12; xiii. 12, (ἰδίῳ αἵματι, 4 Mace. vii. 8); τὸ ἴδιον μίσθωμα, which he had hired for himself (opp. to ἡ ξενία [q. v-], 23), Acts xxviii. 30; add, Jn. v.43; vii. 18; Acts iii. 12; xiil. 36; Ro. xi. 24; xiv. 4 sq.3 1 Co. iii. 8 (ἴδιον κόπον) ; vi. 185 vii. 4,37; ix. 7; xi. 21; Gal. vi.5; 1 Tim. ill. 4,12; v. 4; 2 Tim.i.9; iv. 3; πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια, to do one’s own business (and not intermeddle with the affairs of others), 1 Th. iv. 11; ἰδία ἐπίλυσις, an interpretation which one thinks out for himself, opp.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἴδιος (A.D. 156) ἐγνώρισα τὴν ἰδίαν μου σφραγῖδα, 75. 49 515 (A.D. 181-9) γράψω τῇ ἰδίᾳ μου χειρί, BGU III. 865? (}Α.}.} ἀκολούθως τῇ ἰδ]ίᾳ σοι (1. σου) ἐπιστολῇ, 73. I. 1315 (A.D. 280) ἐκδικήσωμεν. . τοῖς ἰδίοις ἑαυτῶν δαπανήμασιν, Ρ Grenf II. 801 (A.D. 402) ὑπὲρ ἰδίας σου κεφαλῆς. It will hardly be denied, however, that in all these passages ἴδιος adds a certain emphasis, and this undoubtedly holds good of the general NT usage, as e.g. Jn 141, 1 Cor 3°, Gal 6°, Heb 7*7, etc.: see more particularly Pro/eg. p. 87 ff. (as against Deissmann BS p. 123 f.), and cf. Souter (Zex. s.v.) where the word is rendered ‘‘one’s own,’’ ‘‘ belonging to one,” ‘‘private,’’ ‘* personal,” without any mention of a weaker meaning. Winer-Schmiedel G7 § 22, 17, on the other hand, claims for the word both senses in the NT, and illustrates these in detail. It is probably impossible to draw the line strictly, so…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἴδιος (idios) — one's own/private.

ἴδιος [ῐδ], α, ον,

Attic dialect also ος, ον [Refs 5th c.BC+]:

I. one's own, pertaining to oneself: hence,

I.1. private, personal (opposed to κοινός): twice in [Refs 8th c.BC+] this business is private, not public, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἴδιος ἐν κοινῷ σταλείς embarking as a private man in a public cause, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἰ. στόλῳ χρᾶσθαι, opposed to δημοσίῳ, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἴδια πράσσων ἢ στρατοῦ ταχθεὶς ὕπ; [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ξυμβόλαια[Refs], etc.; τὰ ἱρά, opposed to τὰ ἴ., temples, opposed to private buildings, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ ἐν ἰδίοις discussion among private persons, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἴδιος

idios

of uncertain affinity; pertaining to self, i.e. one's own; by

implication, private or separate:--X his acquaintance, when they were

alone, apart, aside, due, his (own, proper, several), home, (her, our,

thine, your) own (business), private(-ly), proper, severally, their

(own).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἴδιος, α, ν

Adj

one’s own, private, personal

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἴδιος idios 114x

one’s own, Mk. 15:20; Jn. 7:18; due, proper, specially assigned, Gal. 6:9; 1 Tim. 2:6; 6:15; Tit. 1:3; also used in NT as a simple possessive, Eph. 5:22; τὰ ἴδια, one’s home, household, people, Jn. 1:11; 16:32; 19:17; οἱ ἴδιοι, members of one’s own household, friends, Jn. 1:11; Acts 24:23; ἰδίᾳ, adverbially, respectively, 1 Cor. 12:11

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἴδιος ἴ^διος, η, ον one's own, pertaining to oneself: and so,

private, personal, πρῆξις ἥδ᾽ ἰδίη οὐ δήμιος this business is private, not public, Od.; ἴδιος ἐν κοινῷ σταλείς embarking a private man in a public cause, Pind.; πλοῦτος ἴδιος καὶ δημόσιος private and public wealth, Thuc.; τὰ ἱρὰ καὶ τὸ ἴδια temples and private buildings, Hdt.

τὰ ἴδια, either private affairs, private interests, Thuc.; or one's own property, id. Thuc.; ἴδια πράττειν to mind one's own affairs, Eur.; τὰ ἐμὰ ἴδια Dem.:—in sg., τὸ ἡμέτερον ἴδιον id. Dem.; εἰς τὸ ἴδιον for oneself, Xen.; τοὐμὸν ἴδιον for my own part, Luc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-ASF — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-ASF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%own
own82% · 96×private8% · 9×his own4% · 5×other renderings4% · 5×other renderings2% · 2×

117 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial65%object24%indirect object6%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 113 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςἐνκατά
κατά
αὐτόςτόποςa placeὑψηλόςhigh, lofty
καιρόςfitting season, oppo
μαρτύριονwitness, evidencὅςδέbut, on the othe
γάρfor
μένDisjκαιρόςfitting season,
πατήρfather, Father, ance
καίand, even, also,
ἴδιος[on his] own.113×
what comes after →
ἀνήρa male human being,
ἵναin order that, sἔχωI have, hold, poἐπερωτάωI interrogate, q
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀκούωI hear, listenἐνἀπαγγέλλωI report, bring
λέγωI say, speak
διάλέγωI say, speakμακάριοςhappy, blessed
αὐτός
οὐNegὑπηρετέωI minister to, sπροφήτηςa prophet, poet
σῶμαbody, flesh
οὐNegἁμαρτάνωI sin

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἴδιος · 113× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Acts John Matthew 1 Timothy Mark 2 Peter Luke Romans Hebrews Titus Galatians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 52c. AD 40

πολλαῖς δὲ καὶ ἄλλαις κέχρηται δυνάμεσι τετράς, ἃς ἀκριβέστερον καὶ ἐν τῷ περὶ αὐτῆς ἰδίῳ λόγῳ προσυποδεικτέον.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.9c. AD 100

ὅτε δὲ τοὺς ἰδίους ἀποστόλους τοὺς μέλλοντας κηρύσσειν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον αὐτοῦ ἐξελέξατο, ὄντας ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν ἁμαρτίαν ἀνομωτέρους, ἵνα δείξῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἦλθεν καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς, τότε ἐφανέρωσεν ἑαυτὸν εἶναι υἱὸν θεοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD

ἀποκαταστησάτωσαν εἰς οἶκον τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶσι καθότι πρόκειται ἀποτεισάτωσαν ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ ἡμιόλιον παραχρῆμα,

P.Amh. 2 48Pathyris107 BC

μόνιμον ἕως Ἁθὺρ λ τοῦ δεκάτου ἔτους, καὶ ἀποκαταστησάτω εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου κεραμίου χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς χιλίας

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

Παχὼν τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους καθαρὸν ἀπὸ παντὸς καὶ ἀποκαθεσταμένον εἰς οἶκον ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασι μέτρῳ ᾧ καὶ παρείληφεν· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνωι ἢ

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ἀκούσαντεςakouō having heard [of it] G191 Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
428× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To hear or listen, not just with our ears but also to understand and obey, as Jesus says in Mark 4:3 and Matthew 11:15. It involves paying attention to what is being said and responding accordingly.
Tyndale gloss
to hear
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀκούω, transliterated as akouo, means 'to hear' or 'to listen.' It covers a range of meanings from simply hearing sounds to understanding and obeying what is said. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including commands to listen (e.g., Mk 4:3) and references to understanding (e.g., 1 Cor 14:2). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀκούω,

[in LXX chiefly for שׁמע;]

to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing.

Intrans.: Mk 4:3 7:37, Ja 2:5, Re 2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mt 13:15(LXX); c. cogn. dat., ακοῇ ἀ. (v.s. ἀκοή), Mt 13:14, Ac 28:26(LXX); ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mt 11:15, Mk 4:23, Re 2:7, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀκούω [on the use of the pres. in a pf. sense ef. W. 274 sq. (258); B. 203 (176)]; impf. ἤκουον ; fut. (in best Grk. usage) ἀκούσομαι, Jn. v. 25 RGL, 28 RGL; Acts iii. 22; vii. 37 RG; xvii. 32; [xxi. 22]; xxv. 22; xxviii. 28; [Ro. x. 14 Tdf.], and (a later form) ἀκούσω. Mt. xii. 19; xiii. 14, (both fr. the Sept.) ; [Jn. x. 16; xvi. 13 Tr WH mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26]; Ro. x. 14 ΓΒ 617; and T Tr WH in Jn. v. 25, 28, (ef. W.82 (79); B. 53 (46) [Veitch 5. v.]); [1 aor. ἤκουσα; Jn. iii. 32, ete.]; pf. ἀκήκοα; Pass.,[ pres. ἀκούομαι; 1 fut.axovaOncopar]; 1 aor. ἠκούσθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; tohear. I. absol. 1. tobe endowed with the faculty of hearing (not deaf): Mk. vii. 37; Lk. vii. 22; Mt.xi.5. 2. to attend to (use the faculty of hearing), consider what is or has been said. So in exhortations: ἀκούετε, Mk. iv. 3; ἀκούσατε, Jas. ii. 5; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω, Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9, [in both T…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀκούω. The verb is of course common enough, and needs little or no illustration, having few peculiarities. Its use for a judicial hearing (as Ac 2523) may be paralleled with P Tand οἷ (ii/A.p.) Kal [pé]x [pr] τούτου οὔπο ἠκούσθ[ημ]εν, and P Oxy VII. 1032 (A.p. 162), where the epistrategus endorses a petition with ἀκουσθήσεται. So in BGU IL. 511i? (= Chrest. 1. p. 26), an account written about A.D. 200 of a trial before Claudius, we have ἀκούει Κλαύδιος Καῖσα[ρ Σέβαστος ᾿Ισιδώρου] γυμνασιάρχου πόλεως ᾿Α[λεξανδρέων] κατὰ ᾿Αγρίππου βασιλέω[ς]. The last example will illustrate ἀκούειν with normal gen. of person: P Par 485 (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski*® p. 91) ἀκούσαντες . . τὰ περὶ σοῦ συνβεβηκότα will serve for accus. vez, and will also illustrate the common use with περί, since the phrase is a mixture of ἀκ. περὶ σοῦ and ἀκ. τά σοι συνβεβηκότα (Witk.).…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀκούω (akouō) — to hear.

ἀκούω:

Epic dialect imperfect ᾰκουον[Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἀκούσομαι (active ἀκούσω first in [NT+4th c.BC+]aorist ἤκουσα, Epic dialect ᾰκουσα[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect ἀκήκοα, Laconian dialect ἄκουκα[Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἤκουκα is a late form, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; later Ionic dialect ἀκήκουκα[Refs 3rd c.BC+]: pluperfect ἀκηκόειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; old Attic dialect ἠκηκόη[Refs 5th c.BC+] —rare in middle, present (see. below [Refs]: Epic dialect imperfect ἀκούετο[Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκουσάμην[Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—passive, future ἀκουσθήσομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκούσθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἤκουσμαι[Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἀκήκουσμαι is uncertain in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: pluperfect ἤκουστο[Refs 4th c.BC+], (παρ-) [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—hear, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: properly with accusative of thing heard, genitive of person from whom it is heard, ταῦτα Καλυψοῦς ἤκουσα[Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀκούω

akouo

a primary verb; to hear (in various senses):--give (in the) audience

(of), come (to the ears), (shall) hear(-er, -ken), be noised, be

reported, understand.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀκούω

v.

I hear, listen

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀκούω akouō 428x

some list the future active as a middle deponent, ἀκούσομαι, to hear; to hearken, listen to, Mk. 4:3; Lk. 19:48; to heed, obey, Mt. 18:15; Acts 4:19; to understand, 1 Cor. 14:2; to take in or admit to mental acceptance, Mk. 4:33; Jn. 8:43, 47

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀκούω Root ΑΚΟϜ to hear, Hom., etc. —Construct., properly, c. acc. of thing heard, gen. of pers. from whom it is heard, ταῦτα Καλυψοῦς ἤκουσα Od.; the gen. pers. may be omitted, ἀκήκοας λόγον Soph., or the acc. rei, ἄκουε τοῦ θανόντος id. Soph.:—often however c. gen. rei, to have hearing of a thing.

c. gen. objecti, to hear of, hear tell of, ἀκ. πατρός Od.; so c. acc., Od.:—so, ἀκ. περί τινος.

the pers. from whom the thing is heard takes a prep., ἀκούειν τι ἀπό, ἔκ, παρά, πρός τινος, Il., attic

to know by hearsay, εἴ που ἀκούεις Od.; so Plat., etc.

absol. to hearken, give ear, to begin a proclamation, ἀκούετε λεώι hear, O people.

to listen to, give ear to, Il.

to obey, c. gen., or more rarely c. dat., id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-NPM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
20%having heard
having heard20% · 88×hearing10% · 45×hear9% · 39×i heard7% · 31×heard6% · 28×you have heard4% · 18×he should hear4% · 16×you hear2% · 9×other renderings37% · 161×

435 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 90 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb89%adverbial11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 428 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁράωI see, look uponαὐτόςβλέπωI look, see
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, exist
ὅς
ἀκούωI hear, listenπᾶςall, the whole, λόγοςa word, speech,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theὅτανwhen, whensoeverὡςas, like as, how
οὖςthe ear
ἔχωI have, hold, poArticle the
ἀκούωhaving heard [of it]428×
what comes after →
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, μαθητήςa learner, disciπερί
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegβλέπωI look, see
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτοςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅτιthat, since, because
εἶπονI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,πολύςmuch, many, ofteσυζητέωI seek together,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀκούω · 428× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Revelation Mark 1 John Hebrews Ephesians Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament23 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 515 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.16c. AD 40

ὅταν οὖν λέγῃ „ἰδεῖν τί καλέσει", ἄκουε ἴσον τῷ, διὰ τί καλέσει καὶ προσκαλέσεται καὶ ἀσπάσεται τούτων ἕκαστον ὁ νοῦς·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.184c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ μὲν ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας θυσίαν προσφέρει τῷ θεῷ κελευσθεὶς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.3c. AD 100

ἀκούσατε, πῶς περὶ τούτου πεφανέρωκαν οἱ ἱερεῖς τοῦ ναοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Lond. 7 2011Pharbaithos (Arsinoites)244 BC

r Παταικίων Ζήνωνι χαίρειν. ἀκηκόαμεν παρὰ Πύρρου τοὺς αἰπόλους ἀναχωρεῖν. τὸν μὲν οὖν Λιμναῖον ἔφη ἤδη ἀπεληλυθέναι, Δημήτριον δὲ

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59368Memphis (?)242 BC

ϛ ἔτους τινὰ δὲ ἐν τῶι Μεμφίτηι, ἃ εἶχεν Παμῆς καὶ Ἀμεννεύς, οὓς νῦν ἀκούομεν μεταγηγοχέναι εἰς τὸν Ἡρακλεοπολίτην ἄνευ ἡμῶν, Ἀμμώνιος δʼ ὁ οἰκονόμος ἀπαγήοχεν αὐτοὺς καὶ τὰ

P.Grenf. 2 36Pathyris96 BC

ἡμῖν κακὸν ἐποίησεν ἀλλʼ ἐκ τῶν ἐναντίων ἐπιμεμέληται, περὶ ὧν, ἐὰν αἱρῆτε, γράψατέ μοι. ἠκούσαμεν τὸν μῦν καταβεβρωκέναι τὸν σπόρον. καλῶς ἡμῖν ὦδε, ἢ ἐν Διοσπόλει ἐὰν αἱρῆσθε, πυρὸν

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
οἱho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ὄχλοιochlos crowds G3793 Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
174× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A crowd is a large group of people, like in Matthew 5:1 where Jesus taught the crowd. It can also refer to a riot or a class of people.
Amplified meaning
a large group of people, multitude
Tyndale gloss
crowd
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὄχλος (i.e., *ochlos*) refers to a moving crowd or multitude of people, often implying a throng or mob. It can denote the common people in a political sense, contrasting with the elite. The New Testament frequently uses it to describe gatherings of people, as seen in verses like Matthew 5:1 and John 7:49. The entries do not present significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὄχλος, -ου, ὁ,

[in LXX for הָמוֹן (chiefly in Da TH), חַיִל, קָהָל, etc.;]

a moving crowd or multitude of persons, a throng: Mt 9:23, Mk 2:4, Lk 5:1, Jo 5:13, al.; pl., Mt 5:1, Mk 10:1, Lk 3:7, and freq.; ὄ. ἱκανός, Mk 10:46, al.; τοσοῦτος, Mt 15:33; οὐ μετ’ ὄχλου, Ac 24:18; ἄτερ ὄχλου, Lk 22:6; πᾶς ὁ ὄ., Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὄχλος, -ov, 6, in the N. T. only in the historical bks. and five times in the Rev.; asin Grk. writ. fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down, a crowd, i. e. 1. a casual collection of people; a multitude of men who have flocked together in some place, a throng : Mt. ix. 23, 25; xv. 10, ete. ; Mk. ii. 4; iii. 9, and often; Lk. v. 1,19; vii. 9,ete.; Jn. v. 13; vi. 22, 24; vii. 20, 32,49, etc.; Actsxiv. 14; xvii. 8; xxi. 34; τὶς ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου, Lk. xi. 27; xii. 13; or ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου, xix. 39; ix. 38; ἀπὸ (for 1. 6. on account of [ef. ἀπό, 11. 2b.]) τ. ὄχλου, Lk. xix. 3; ἡ βία τ. ὄχλου, Acts xxi. 35; πολὺς ὄχλος and much oftener ὄχλος πολύς, Mt. xiv. 14; xx. 29; xxvi.47; Mk. v. 21, 24; vi. 34; ix. 14; xiv. 43 [here T Tr WH om. L Tr mrg. br. oh. ]; Lk. vii. 11; viii. 4; ix.37; Jn. vi. 2,5; xii. 12 [but here Tr mrg. br. WH prefix 6; cf. B. 91 (80)]; Rev. xix. 1,6; with the art. ὁ πολὺς ὄχλ.» the great…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὄχλος. In P Petr II. 4 (6)!® (B.c. 255-4) an official complains that on his way to work he had been hustled, and that, if care is not taken, he will be assaulted—8ivdv γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλωι ἀτιμάζεσθαι, ‘for it is a dreadful thing to be insulted before a crowd” (Ed.), and in 26. 4.51}. 23 (B.c. 246) ἄλλος ὄχ[λος ἐστεφ]ανωμένος is distinguished from various officials. A striking parallel to Mk 15%® (noted by the editor) is afforded by P Flor I. 618 (A.D. 85) (= Chest. II. p. 89), where the Egyptian Governor addresses a certain Phibion, who had been tried before him, in the words—&g.os μ[ὲ]ν ἧς μαστιγωθῆναι. . . χαρίζομαι δέ σε τοῖς ὄχλοις, ‘you deserved to be scourged, but I hand you over to the multitude.” [Note the use of ὄχλος in the plur., as frequently in Mt (e.g. 42°), with apparently the same meaning as the sing.] A Gnostic charm of iti/iv A.D., P Oxy XII. 1478, contains the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὄχλος (ochlos) — crowd.

ὄχλος, ὁ,

crowd, throng, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄ. τῶν στρατιωτῶν the mass of the soldiers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὄχλῳ in numbers (for an army), [Refs]; οἱ τοιοῦτοι ὄ. undisciplined masses like these,[Refs 2nd c.AD+]; of the camp-followers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. in political sense, populace, mob, opposed to δῆμος (people), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δικαστηρίων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὄ. and popular assemblies (in a contemptuous sense), [Refs 5th c.BC+] this is already in the mouths of the people, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

3. generally, mass, multitude, ὄ. τὸν πλεῖστον λόγων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵππων ὄ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: in plural, the masses, καχεξία τις ὑποδέδυκε τοὺς ὄχλους [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὄχλος

ochlos

from a derivative of 2192 (meaning a vehicle); a throng (as borne

along); by implication, the rabble; by extension, a class of people;

figuratively, a riot:--company, multitude, number (of people), people,

press.

see GREEK for 2192

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὄχλος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a crowd

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὄχλος ochlos 175x

a crowd, a confused multitude of people, Mt. 4:25; 5:1; 7:28; spc. the common people, Jn. 7:49; a multitude, great number, Lk. 5:29; 6:17; Acts 1:15; by impl. tumult, uproar, Lk. 22:6; Acts 24:18

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὄχλος ὄχλος, ὁ, a moving crowd, a throng, mob, Pind., Aesch., etc.; ὁ ὄχλος τῶν στρατιωτῶν the mass of the soldiers, Xen.; τῷ ὄχλῳ in point of numbers, Thuc.; οἱ τοιοῦτοι ὄχλοι undisciplined masses like these, id. Thuc.

in political sense, the populace, mob, Lat. turba, opp. to δῆμος, id. Thuc., Xen.

generally, a mass, multitude, ὄχλος λόγων Aesch.

like Lat. turba, annoyance, trouble, ὄχλον παρέχειν τινί to give one trouble, Hdt.; δι᾽ ὄχλου εἶναι, γενέσθαι to be or become troublesome, Ar., Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NPM — Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
60%crowd
crowd60% · 105×crowds31% · 55×multitude4% · 7×other renderings3% · 6×other renderings2% · 3×

176 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject55%object21%adverbial14%indirect object10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 174 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, δέbut, on the otheφοβέωI fear, am terri
αὐτός
ἀκολουθέωI accompany, attπρόςμετά
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theσύνειμι (II)I come togetherἀκούωI hear, listen
πολύςmuch, many, often
ὁράωI see, look uponδέbut, on the otheπάλινagain, further,
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςπεδινόςlevelχῆροςa widow
ὄχλοςcrowds174×
what comes after →
πολύςmuch, many, often
καίand, even, also,ὥστεso that, therefoἀπό
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgοὐδέποτεNeg
Article the
ἵστημιI cause to standπροάγωI lead forth, goἱκανόςsufficient, wort
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakσπλαγχνίζομαιI have pity on
ὅτιthat, since, because
ἤδηnow, alreadyὡςas, like as, howἕξIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὄχλος · 174× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke Mark Acts John Revelation

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 17 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.76c. AD 40

διὰ τοῦτο καὶ τὸ λαῶδες καὶ ὄχλον ἔχον ἐν ἡμῖν μέρος,

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.336c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ Ἡσαῦς ἀσπασάμενος αὐτὸν ἀνήρετο τῶν παίδων τὸν ὄχλον καὶ τὰς γυναῖκας, ἠξίου τε τότε μαθὼν περὶ αὐτῶν τὸ πᾶν καὶ αὐτὸς συμβαδίζειν αὐτοῖς πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, Ἰακώβου δὲ προφασιζομένου τὸν κόπον τῶν ὑποζυγίων ὑπεχώρησεν εἰς Σάειραν·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 25.1.16c. AD 140

ἕτεροι δὲ ἤρχοντο τὰς ῥάβδους χλωρὰς φέροντες ὡς ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου: τὸ δὲ πλεῖον μέρος τοῦ ὄχλου τοιαύτας ῥάβδους ἐπεδίδουν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC 1st c. BC 3rd c. AD
O.Did. 341DidymoiAD 77–AD 92

ἐάν τι ἀκούσῃς περὶ ἡμῶν τῶν σουκεσσόρων ἀντίγραψόν μοι. ἐκόμισα κι… ον επεν… μὴ ὀχλοῦ … εραν

P.Oxy. 12 1481Oxyrhynchites (?)AD 101–AD 125

ἐλυπήθην ἀκούσας ὅτι ἤκουσας. οὐ γὰρ δεινῶς ἠσθένησα. μέμφομαι δὲ τὸν εἴπαντα σοι. μὴ ὀχλοῦ δὲ πέμπειν τι ἡμῖν. ἐκομισάμεθα δὲ τὰ θαλλία παρὰ τοῦ τοῦ Ἡρακλείδου. Διονυτᾶς δὲ

O.Claud. 4 889Mons ClaudianusAD 150–AD 154

τρεῖς. ἐὰν δὲ πέμπω ἕνα οὐκέτι ἔχω πέμψαι εἰς τὴν λατομίαν. οἶδας δὲ ὅτι ὄχλον πολὺν δαπανᾶ εἰς τὴν κατάστασιν. ἐγὼ δ …τα τὰ παρʼ ἐμε … … ηκα

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ἠκολούθησανakoloutheō followed G190 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
90× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To follow means to accompany someone, like a disciple following Jesus, as seen in Matthew 4:25 and John 12:26.
Tyndale gloss
to follow
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἀκολουθέω (akoloutheo) means to follow or accompany, particularly in the context of discipleship. It is derived from the word for 'following' and is often used in the New Testament to describe the act of following Jesus (e.g., Matthew 4:25). The verb typically takes a dative object, indicating the person being followed. There is a note of distinction in usage, as it replaces the verb ἕπομαι in later Greek.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀκολουθέω, -ῶ

(< ἀκόλουθος, following; < ἀ- cop., κέλευθος, poët., away),

[in LXX chiefly for הָלַךְ;]

to accompany, follow: Mt 4:25, al. Metaph., of discipleship: Mt 9:9, Mk 9:38, Jo 12:26, al. Absol.: Mt 18:10; more freq., c. dat. (cl.), Mt 8:1, al.; seq. μετά, c. gen, (cl.; Eutherford, N.Phr., 458 f.), Lk 9:49; ὀπίσω, c. gen. (Heb. הָלַךְ אחֲֲרֵי), Mt 10:38 (cf. ἐξ-, ἐπ-, κατ-, παρ-, συν-ἀκολουθέω).

SYN.: (cl.) ἕπομαι, not in NT (v. Cremer, 80; MM, VGT, s.v.).

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀκολουθέω, -@; fut. ἀκολουθήσω; impf. ἠκολούθουν ; 1 aor. ἠκολούθησα; pf. ἠκολούθηκα (Mk. x. 28 1, Τ Tr WH); (fr. ἀκόλουθος, and this fr. a copulative and κέλευθοὸς road, prop. walking the same road) ; 1. to follow one who precedes, join him as his attendant, accompany him: Mtsiv. 25; viii. 19; ix. 19; xxvii. 55; Mk. iii. 7; “ὦ ν. 24, [37 Lehm.]; xiv. δ1 [ἢ G]; Lk. xxii. 39,54; xxiii. 27; Jn. i. 37 sq. 43 (44); vi. 2; xviii. 15; xx. 6, ete.; Acts xii. 8; xiii. 43; xxi. 36; 1 Co. x. 4; distinguished fr. προάγειν in Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9; trop. τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν ἀκολουθεῖ per’ αὐτῶν, their good deeds will accompany them to the presence of God the judge to be rewarded by him, Rev. xiv. 13; on the other hand, ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῆς ai ἁμαρτίαι ἄχρι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, Rev. xviii. 5, but here for ἠκολούθησαν (ἃ 1, Τ Tr WH have restored ἐκολλήθησαν; [σημεῖα τοῖς πιστεύσασιν ἀκολουθήσει ταῦτα, Mk. xvi. 17 Tr…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀκολουθέω is still the word for ‘‘ following,” in MGr (ἀκλουθῶ) : it is noteworthy that in a large batch of petitions in P Ryl II. 124-152, from Euhemeria (A.D. 28-42) we find the MGr form anticipated four times (ἐπηκλούθησε or -ηκότος). In the papyri the verb takes the place of ἕπομαι, which is also wanting in the NT, and in the LXX is confined to 3 In the most literal sense we have such passages as P Lond 131 recfo®® (a.p. 78-9) (=I. p. 171) παιδ(ῶν) B ἀκολουθούντων τοῖς ὄνοις. P Lille I. 1 verso™8 (B.C. 259) has an inanimate object: ἀκολουθήσουσι δὲ τοῖς προὐπάρχουσι χώμασι, “they will follow up, continue, the existing banks.” For the thought of “ following” to get a favour see BGU IV. 1079*° (A.D. 41) (= Selections, Ρ. 39), ἀκολούθει δὲ Ττολλαρίωνι πᾶσαν ὥραν, “stick to Ptollarion constantly”: cf. 1. 38 μᾶλλον ἀκολουθῶν αὐτῷ δύνῃ φιλιάσαι αὐτῷ, “rather stick to him, and so you may…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀκολουθέω (akoloutheō) — to follow.

ἀκολουθ-έω,

follow one, go after or with him, frequently of soldiers and slaves:—mostly with dative person, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. ἐφ᾽ ἁρπαγήν, of soldiers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀκολουθῶν, ὁ, as substantive, ={ἀκόλουθος}[Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. of stars, follow in the diurnal rotation, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. metaphorically, follow, be guided by, τῇ γνώμῃ τινός[Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοῖς πράγμασιν, τοῖς τοῦ πολέμου καιροῖς, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; obey, τοῖς νόμοις[Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. follow the thread of a discourse, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.3. of things, follow upon, to be consequent upon, consistent with, εὐλογία.. εὐηθείᾳ ἀ.[Refs]; follow analogy of, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀκολουθέω

akoloutheo

from 1 (as a particle of union) and keleuthos (a road); properly, to

be in the same way with, i.e. to accompany (specially, as a

disciple):--follow, reach.

see GREEK for 1

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀκολουθέω

v.

I accompany, attend, follow

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀκολουθέω akoloutheō 90x

to follow; follow as a disciple; imitate

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀκολουθέω ἀκόλουθος to follow one, go after or with him, c. dat. pers., Ar., etc.; also, ἀκ. μετά τινος Plat.; σύν τινι Xen.; κατόπιν τινός Ar.:— absol., Plat., etc.

metaph. to follow, obey, τινι Thuc., etc.; ἀκ. τοῖς πράγμασιν to follow circumstances, Dem.

to follow the thread of a discourse, Plat.

of things, to follow upon, be consequent upon, τοῖς εἰρημένοις id. Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3P — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
23%following
following23% · 21×followed20% · 18×do follow15% · 14×they followed8% · 7×follow7% · 6×he was following4% · 4×he should follow4% · 4×i will follow3% · 3×other renderings15% · 14×

91 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 19 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb99%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 90 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἀναβλέπωI look up, recovπᾶςall, the whole,
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakπατήρfather, Father, πρός
Article the
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakσύ
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article the
ἀνίστημιI raise up, set up,
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole,
ἀκολουθέωfollowed90×
what comes after →
αὐτός
ὄχλοςa crowdκαίand, even, also,Article the
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,ἐνArticle the
σύ
ὅπουwhere, whitherτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
δέbut, on the other ha
αὐτόςὕστεροςlastly, afterwarArticle the
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusἀρνίονa lamb

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀκολουθέω · 90× in the New Testament
Matthew John Mark Luke Revelation Acts 1 Corinthians
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.197c. AD 40

οὗ χάριν καὶ Ἀβραὰμ ἀκολουθῶν τῷ θεοῦ θελήματι τὰ μὲν ὑπάρχοντα, ἅπερ ἦν αὐτῷ ἐκ θεοῦ, κατέχει, ἀποπέμπεται δὲ τὴν ἵππον τοῦ βασιλέως Σοδόμων (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 5.127c. AD 75–95

τὴν γὰρ πατρίδα καταλιπόντες ἠκολούθησαν ἐκείνοις καὶ συνῆσαν αὐτοῖς ἐπὶ τῆς ἐρήμου.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 40.4c. AD 96

οἱ οὖν τοῖς προστεταγμένοις καιροῖς ποιοῦντες τὰς προσφορὰς αὐτῶν εὐπρόσδεκτοί τε καὶ μακάριοι: τοῖς γὰρ νομίμοις τοῦ δεσπότου ἀκολουθοῦντες οὐ διαμαρτάνουσιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 1st c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
PSI 15 1517Psenamosis (Hermopolites ?)AD 32–AD 33

δεδομένου παρὰ Ζωίλου … … ν περὶ τὴν κωμογραμματείαν κώμης Ποιμένων ὑπομνήματος ἀντίγραφον συνεσφράγισται· ἀκολουθήσαντες οὖν τοῖς δι’ αὐτοῦ σημαινομένοις καὶ μετα … … δηλουμένοις τἄλλα ἐπισκέψασθε ὡς καθήκει

P.Fouad 1 28OxyrhynchosAD 59

μηνὸς Φαρμοῦθι τοῦ ε ἔτους Νέρωνος Κλαυδίου Καίσαρος Σεβαστοῦ Γερμανικοῦ Αὐτοκράτορος, δοῦλος Σαραπίωνος Δόρκωνος ἀκολουθῶν λουθωνὄνοις αἰροῦσι λίθους περιτυχών μοι πλησίον … δεκατης, εἷς τῶν ὄνων ἐνετίναξεν ἐπὶ τὸ

P.Stras. 6 508HermopolitesAD 156

σαν τὴν γῆν α … τῷ κυρίῳ αλε … τόπων … … μοι ἀκολουθῶν … … καὶ ἀπομ … λας. ὁ δὲ λαβὼν α … ἀπέδειξεν π

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
αὐτῷautos Him G846 Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-DSM — Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-DSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςHim5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
πεζῇpezē on foot G3979 Adverb
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Matthew than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means on foot or by land, as seen in Matthew 14:13 and Mark 6:33. It describes traveling by walking, rather than by sea or other means.
Amplified meaning
by land, walking
Tyndale gloss
on foot
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πεζῇ is the dative feminine form of πεζός, meaning 'on foot' or 'by land.' It contrasts with travel by sea and is used in the New Testament in Matthew 14:13 and Mark 6:33. The lexicons indicate a consistent meaning related to land travel, but some entries elaborate on its use in various contexts, including military and poetic.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πεζός, -ή, -όν

(< πούς),

[in LXX for רַגְלִי;]

on foot: Mt 14:13 (WH, mg., R, txt.).

Opp. to going by sea, by land: Mt 14:13 (WH, mg., R, mg.).

As adv., πεζῇ (sc. ὁδῷ), on foot or by land: Mt 14:13 (WH, txt.), Mk 6:33.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πεζῇ (dat. fem. fr. πεζός, 4. v-; cf. Matthiae § 400), on foot or (if opp. to going by sea) by land: Mt. xiv. 13 RG Tr Ltxt. WH txt.; Mk. vi. 33. (Hdt., Thue., Xen., Dem., al.)

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πεζῇ. For the contrast in Mk 6f between ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ‘in the boat,” and πεζῇ (sc. ὁδῷ), ‘‘ by land,’’ cf. PSI V. 44618 (A.D. 133-7) μήτε πλέοντι μήτε πεΐῃ βαδί[ζον)τι, and Artem. p. 182! τοῖς διαποροῦσι πότερον πεζῇ ἀπιτέον αὐτοῖς ἢ κατὰ πλοῦν συμβουλεύει πεζῆ. In P Tebt I. 538 (B.c. 118) the word is found witn the two meanings ‘‘on foot’ and ““by land,” opjolws δὲ καὶ τοὺς πεζῆι ἀ[ν]απορε[νυομένους] ἐκ τῆς πόλεως τὴν [ἄ͵γουσαν πεζὴν ὁδὸν. . ., “likewise persons who travel on foot up the country from Alexandria by the land-route which leads . . .” (Edd.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πεζῇ (pezē) — on foot.

Included with: πεζός, ή, όν,

(see. πούς):

1. in Poets, especially Epic dialect,

1. a on foot, walking, πεζοί fighters on foot, opposed to those in chariots, πεζοί θ᾽ ἱππῆές τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; πλῆτο δὲ πᾶν πεδίον πεζῶν τε καὶ ἵππων [Refs 8th c.BC+]

1. b on land, going by land, opposed to sea-faring, especiallyin [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν νηῒ θοῇ ἢ π. [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. in Prose, ὁ π. (with or without στρατός),

2. a sometimes infantry, opposed to cavalry (ἡ ἵππος), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but,

2. b more frequently land-force, army, opposed to naval force, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ π. variant in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; στρατιὰ καὶ ναυτικὴ καὶ π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὰ π. κράτιστοι strongest by land, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ π. μάχη battle by land, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν τοῖς…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πεζῇ

peze

dative case feminine of a derivative of 4228 (as adverb); foot-wise,

i.e. by walking:--a- (on) foot.

see GREEK for 4228

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πεζῇ

Adv

on foot

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πεζῇ pezē 2x

on foot, or, by land, Mt. 14:13; Mk. 6:33

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

foot (reghel, qarcol (only twice in parallel passages: 2Sa 22:37 = Ps 18:36, where it probably means ankle); pous): The dusty roads of Palestine and other eastern lands make a much greater care of the feet necessary than we are accustomed to bestow upon them. The absence of socks or stockings, the use of sandals and low shoes rather than boots and, to an even greater degree, the frequent habit of walking barefoot make it necessary to wash the feet repeatedly every day. This is always done when entering the house, especially the better upper rooms which are usually carpeted. It is a common dictate of good manners to perform this duty to a visitor, either personally or through a servant; at least water for washing has to be presented (

The expressions in De 32:35, "their foot shall slide in due time," and in the traveler’s song, Ps 121:3, "he will not suffer thy foot to be moved," Ps 66:9 Jer 13:16, have reference to the dangerous character of the narrow roads or paths of the East, over rocks and beside precipices where a sliding foot was often fatal. See also Isa 8:14 Lu 2:34. Nakedness of feet was a sign of mourning. God says to Ezekiel, "Make no mourning for the dead, and put on thy shoes upon thy feet," Eze 24:17. It was likewise a mark of…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Washing the feet of the disciples by Jesus Joh 13:4-6

→ By disciples 1Ti 5:10

→ See ABLUTIONS

→ See PURIFICATIONS

→ For footwear, see SHOE

→ FIGURATIVE Mt 18:8

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%on foot
on foot100% · 2×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἀκολουθέωI accompany, att
καίand, even, also, nam
πολύςmuch, many, ofte
πεζῇon foot
what comes after →
ἀπό
Article theπᾶςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπεζῇ · 2× in the New Testament
Matthew Mark
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.170c. AD 75–95

τῶν οὖν κρίκων ἀσθενῶν ὄντων κατʼ αὐτοὺς ἐνεγκεῖν τὸ βάρος τῶν λίθων ἑτέρους δύο κρίκους μείζονας τῇ πέζῃ τοῦ ἐσσήνου ᾗπερ ἀνήκει πρὸς τὸν τράχηλον ἐμβεβηκότας τῷ ὑφάσματι ποιοῦσι, δεξομένους ἁλύσεις εἰργασμένας, αἳ συνῆσαν κατʼ ἄκρον τῶν ὤμων…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD

ἀνταποδοῦναι τὰς χάριτας· οἶδα γάρ, ἅ μοι παρέχῃ· ἐὰν δὲ εὕρῃς τινὰ ἀσφαλῆον ἐρχόμενον, πεζῇ ἀπόστειλον τὸν ἵππον μου κατʼ Ἀκάμαν, καὶ ἐὰν χρείαν ἔχῃ, δοῖς αὐτῶι· πᾶσαν δὲ

PSI 5 446AD 133–AD 137

ἁπαξαπλῶς μηδενὶ παρέχειν ἄνευ διπλῆς μηθὲ ἓν τῶν εἰς παραπομπὴν διδομένων μήτε πλέοντι μήτε πεζῇ βαδίζοντι, ὡς ἐμοῦ κολάσοντος ἐρρωμένως ἐάν τις ἁλῷ μετὰ τοῦτο τὸ διάταγμα λαμβάνων ἢ

P.Hombert 2 41Contrapollonopolis (?) oder Theben (?)AD 126–AD 200

μου καὶ … κειον σὸν Ἑρμῆτι· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ εὕρῃς, ταχύτερον πέμψον μοι Ἑρμῆν πεζῇ. καὶ ἐὰν χρείαν ἔχῃ κέρματος εἰς λόγον ἄρτων, δὸς αὐτῷ καὶ ἐμοὶ ἐλλόγησαν. μὴ

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
ἀπὸapo from G575 Preposition
647× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means moving away from something, like a place or a time. It's used in many parts of the Bible, like Matthew 5:29 and Luke 5:2, to show movement or separation. It can also mean because of something.
Tyndale gloss
away from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),

prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),

[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]

from (i.e. from the exterior).

Of separation and cessation;

of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;

in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;

of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀπό (apo) — away from.

ἀπό,

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit

__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]

__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀπό

apo

a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various

senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X

here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),

from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as

a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,

completion, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀπό

Prep.

from, away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀπό apo 646x

pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.

prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.

of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.

of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.

in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.

OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.

OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%from
from82% · 556×of7% · 48×by3% · 22×other renderings8% · 51×

677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%subject5%predicate2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐκπορεύομαιI journey out, cἀπόλαόςa people, the cr
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existτρεῖςthreeδεκατέσσαρεςfourteen
Article the
τὶςγινώσκωI come to know, ἸησοῦςJesus
ἐγώ
ὥστεso that, therefoκαθαρίζωI make cleanῥύομαιI rescue
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of mind
καίand, even, also,ἔλεοςpity, mercyμετά
ἀπόfrom647×
what comes after →
Article the
ΓαλιλαίαGalileeθεόςGod, a godἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, bec
σύ
καίand, even, also,συμφέρωI collect, am prκαλόςbeautiful, good,
θεόςGod, a god
πατήρfather, Father, ἐξέρχομαιI go out, come oἔρχομαιI come, go
ἀρχήruler, beginning
ἵναin order that, sκτίσιςcreation, creatuArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀπό · 647× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts Mark John Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 12c. AD 40

ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ

P.Amh. 2 51Pathyris89 BC

ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
τῶνho the G3588 Article · genitive · plural · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GPF — Article · genitive · plural · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GPF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

and Having heard now <the> Jesus withdrew from there by boat to a secluded place apart [on his] own. And having heard [of it] the crowds followed Him on foot from the towns.
πόλεων.polis towns. G4172 Noun · genitive · plural · feminine
163× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Matthew as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
In the Bible, a city refers to a town with walls, like Jerusalem in Matthew 2:23. It can also mean the people who live there, as in Matthew 10:5. Jesus often visited cities during his ministry.
Amplified meaning
cities, populated areas
Tyndale gloss
city
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πόλις (polis) means 'city' and can refer to an enclosed town or the inhabitants of a city. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in the context of specific cities like Jerusalem or as a general term for urban areas. The word is derived from various dialects and has a rich history in classical literature, indicating both physical locations and the concept of citizenship.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πόλις, -εως, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for עִיר;]

a city: Mt 2:23, Mk 1:45, Lk 4:29, Jo 4:8, al. mult.; opp. to κῶμαι (κ. καὶ ἀγροί), Mt 9:35 10:11, Mk 6:56, Lk 8:1 13:22; c. nom. propr. in appos. (cl.), Ac 11:5 16:14; c. id. in gen. appos. (Bl., § 35, 5), Ac 8:5, II Pe 2:6; gen., of the region, Lk 1:26 4:31, Jo 4:5; of the inhabitants, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πόλις, -ews, 7, (πέλομαι, to dwell [or rather denoting originally ‘fulness,’ ‘ throng’; allied with Lat. pleo, plebs, ete.; ef. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vanitek p. 499; (otherwise Fick i. 138)]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for ~y, besides for 7 Pp, WH (8 ate), ete., a city; a. univ.: Mt. ii. 23; Mk.i.45; Lk. iv. 29; Jn. xi.54; Acts vy. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T. ; κατὰ τὴν πόλιν, through the city [A. V. in; see xara, IT. 1 a.], Acts xxiv. 12; κατὰ πόλιν, κατὰ πόλεις, see κατά, IT. 3 a. a. p. 328"; opp. to κῶμαι, Mt. ix. 35; x.11; Lk. viii. 1; xiii. 22; to κῶμαι καὶ aypot, Mk. vi. 56; ἡ ἰδία πόλις, see ἴδιος, 1 Ὁ. p. 297"; πόλις with the gen. of a pers. one’s native city, Lk. ii. 4,11; Jn.i.44 (45); or the city in which one lives, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. iv. 29; x. 11; Acts xvi. 20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerusalem is called, on account of the temple erected there, πόλις…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πόλις. In the second Logia fragment, P Oxy IV. 6542, Blass suggested the restoration ὑμεῖς ἐστὲ mrd[Ats (sc. τοῦ θεοῦ), and is followed by White (Sayzzgs, p. 9). It may be worth while to note that this ancient by-form of πόλις occurs in three ostraca of the reign of Caligula as a proper name, Ostr 380! διαγεγρά(φηκεν) Πτόλις Ψενεν(ούφιος), 7. 3811, 3821, and similarly in PSI IV. 317! (a.p. 95) ᾿Ασκληπιάδης Πτόλιδι τῶι φιλτάτωι χαίρειν. This recalls πολιτάρχης 5 the fact that πτόλεμος also survived in the royal name ἹΠτολεμαῖος. The distributive force which πόλις has in several Lucan passages (Ac 154 a/.) and in Tit 1° is to be set against the very different meaning of the phrase in sundry documents of the new collection from Alexandria (reign of Augustus). Schubart, who edits the documents in BGU IV., notes (Archiv v. p. 38) that in a good many papers relating to the hire of a nurse…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πόλις (polis) — city.

πόλις,

Epic dialect also πτόλις (found sometimes in Trag. etc., see at {πτόλις}), ἡ: Epic dialect forms, accusative singular πόληα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; genitive πόλιος or πτόλιος, [Refs 8th c.BC+] P.(scanned ?~X ?~X ?~X ¯ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect forms, genitive πόλεως [Refs 6th c.BC+]; dative mostly πόλει, but πόλῑ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative πόλῑς [Refs]: Doric dialect genitive singular πόλιος [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; dative singular πόλι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; dative plural πολίεσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πολίεσσι Foed.Lac. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect πόλιθι [Refs]: Aeolic dialect genitive πόλιος [Refs 7th c.BC+] disyllable (as also in Comedy texts, except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Attic dialect dual πόλη [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—city, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. ἄκρη, ἀκροτάτη, ={ἀκρόπολις}, the citadel, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; which at Athens also was in early times called…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πόλις

polis

probably from the same as 4171, or perhaps from 4183; a town

(properly, with walls, of greater or less size):--city.

see GREEK for 4183

see GREEK for 4171

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πόλις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

a city

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πόλις polis 162x

a city, an enclosed and walled town, Mt. 10:5, 11; 11:1; meton. the inhabitants of a city, Mt. 8:34; 10:15; with a gen. of person, or a personal pronoun, the city of any one, the city of one’s birth or residence, Mt. 9:1; Lk. 2:4, 11; ἡ πόλις, the city, κατ’ ἐξοχήν, Jerusalem, Mt. 21:18; 28:11; met. a place of permanent residence, abode, home, Heb. 11:10, 16; 13:14. The frequency count does not include its occurrence in the name Νέαν πόλιν in Acts 16:11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πόλις πόλις, ιος, ἡ, gen. πόλεως dissyll. in attic Poets ionic and doric πόλιος dissyll. in Il. doric πολίεσι:—acc. πόλεις, πόλιας:— a city, Hom., Hes., etc.; πόλις ἄκρη and ἀκροτάτη, ῀ ἀκρόπολις, the citadel, Il.: this at Athens was often called simply πόλις, while the rest of the city was called ἄστυ, Thuc., etc.:—the name of the city was often added in gen., Ἰλίου π., Ἄργους π. the city of . . , Aesch., etc.; also in appos., ἡ Μένδη π. Thuc.

one's city or country, Od., etc.

when πόλις and ἄστυ are joined, the former is the body of citizens, the latter their dwellings, Il.; ὧν πόλις ἀνάριθμος ὄλλυται, where πόλις = a number of citizens, Soph.:—hence,

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPF — Noun · genitive · plural · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%city
city79% · 131×cities10% · 16×town7% · 12×towns2% · 4×other renderings1% · 2×

165 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial60%subject20%object12%predicate7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 163 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
εἰςἐνκαίand, even, also,
εἰς
κατοικέωI dwell in, settκαίand, even, also,πόλιςa city
κατά
διοδεύωI journey througArticle theδιαπορεύομαιI journey throug
ἄνDisj
δέbut, on the otheὅς
ἐν
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastεἰμίI am, existκίνδυνοςdanger, peril, r
πόλιςtowns.163×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰςὁράωI see, look upon
Article the
μέγαςἅγιοςset apart, holy,ΓαλιλαίαGalilee
ἐκεῖνος
καίand, even, also,ἐκτινάσσωI shake offArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
καίand, even, also,ἕωςuntil, as far asἐν
οὗτος
φεύγωI flee, escape, ἐπίπαρά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπόλις · 163× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew Revelation John Mark Hebrews 2 Corinthians 2 Peter James Jude Romans

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 585 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.62c. AD 75–95

ὅρους τε γῆς πρῶτος ἔθετο καὶ πόλιν ἐδείματο καὶ τείχεσιν ὠχύρωσεν εἰς ταὐτὸν συνελθεῖν τοὺς οἰκείους καταναγκάσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 16.5c. AD 100

πάλιν ὡς ἔμελλεν ἡ πόλις καὶ ὁ ναὸς καὶ ὁ λαὸς Ἰσραὴλ παραδίδοσθαι, ἐφανερώθη.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος παστοφορίου ἐντὸς τοῦ

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν τῶι πατρὶ τοῦ Ὥρου γῆν ἀρουρῶν … ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι Κροκοδίλων πόλεως ἀπὸ σφραγῖδος μιᾶς ἀναγραφομένης εἰς Ψενμ … τῶν πενταρούρων, νότου γῆ Πετεσούχου τοῦ Ἑρμίου

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate